A Passion and A Passport https://apassionandapassport.com/ Proving Travel is Possible with a Full-Time 9-5 Tue, 14 Oct 2025 03:14:52 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=5.8.12 Day Trip to Procida from Naples: How to Spend One Perfect Day on Italy’s Pastel Paradise https://apassionandapassport.com/procida-day-trip/ https://apassionandapassport.com/procida-day-trip/#respond Mon, 13 Oct 2025 19:38:40 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32815 Headed to Italy and planning a day trip to Procida? You’re in the right place! Here’s everything you need to know about spending one day in Procida from Naples.  When I originally booked my trip to Naples, I was thinking I’d take day trips to Capri and the Amalfi Coast. But then I started hearingContinue Reading

The post Day Trip to Procida from Naples: How to Spend One Perfect Day on Italy’s Pastel Paradise appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to Italy and planning a day trip to Procida? You’re in the right place! Here’s everything you need to know about spending one day in Procida from Naples. 

When I originally booked my trip to Naples, I was thinking I’d take day trips to Capri and the Amalfi Coast. But then I started hearing about Procida, and just knew I needed to include this tiny island in my plans. And I’m SO glad I did my day trip to Procida from Naples ended up being one of my favorite days on my entire southern Italy trip!

So, if you’re craving a break from the crowds in Naples (I get it) or the glitz of Capri (yes, it’s a little stuffy), Procida (pronounced Pro-chee-dah) is your postcard-perfect escape! Think candy-colored houses, sun-bleached fishing boats, and a laid-back vibe that feels like stepping back in time. It’s just glorious!

If Capri is the glamorous movie star of the Bay of Naples, then Procida is her effortlessly cool little sister – the one who shows up in vintage linen, doesn’t care about the paparazzi, and somehow steals the scene anyway.

Just a short ferry ride from Naples or Ischia, this tiny island is bursting with pastel fishing villages, lemon groves, and old-world charm that feels refreshingly authentic. Often called a hidden gem of the Amalfi Coast (though technically it sits in the Bay of Naples), Procida is quieter and more low-key than its famous neighbors – and that’s exactly the point. 

Ready to trade crowds for cobblestones, and glamour for genuine charm? Here’s how to spend one day on Procida Italy’s most colorful island (or does that title belong to Burano?! I’ll let you decide). Just promise me one thing – you’ll say hi to Captain Domenico on his boat tour around the island! It was hands-down the highlight of my day!

Procida Day Trip Logistics

Where is Procida? 

Procida is a tiny island in the Bay of Naples, floating between the Italian mainland and the larger island of Ischia. It’s the smallest of the three main islands in the bay (Capri, Ischia, and Procida), and arguably the most authentic. And it’s the closest island to the shore, meaning it doesn’t take too long to get there (which is perfect if all you’ve got is a day in Procida)!

Only about 4 square kilometers in size, Procida sits roughly:

  • 40 minutes by ferry from Naples
  • 20-30 minutes by ferry from Ischia
  • And just a bit further from Capri

Because of its small size and its location in the Bay of Naples, Procida is best visited as a day trip from Naples, Ischia, or even Capri. It’s a world apart from the big-name hot spots like Rome, Venice, Florence, and Puglia, which are much farther away and not directly connected. But if you’re already in southern Italy like I was, it’s an easy (and incredibly rewarding) detour.

How to Get to Procida 

Planning a day trip to Procida is easy from anywhere in the Bay of Naples. Whether you’re coming from Naples, Ischia, Capri, or the Amalfi Coast, just hop on a ferry and you’ll be strolling those candy-colored streets in no time. 

Here’s how to plan your Procida day trip from each spot:

From Naples

  • Departure ports: Molo Beverello (fast hydrofoils) or Porta di Massa (slower ferries)
  • Operators: Caremar, SNAV, Medmar – I used Caremar and it was smooth.
  • Travel time: 40–60 minutes depending on the boat.
  • Cost: About €15–€20 each way. Buy at the port or book online in summer for early departures.
  • Tip: Don’t want to DIY? Try a Naples to Procida transfer with an island boat tour via GetYourGuide — perfect for a seamless Procida day trip. 

From Ischia

  • Departure port: Ischia Porto
  • Travel time: Just 20–30 minutes – the quickest hop of all.
  • Why it’s great: Ideal if you’re staying on Ischia and want an easy day trip to Procida without much planning.

From Capri

  • Connections: Occasional ferries, often with a transfer in Ischia or Naples.
  • Plan ahead: Schedules are limited and not daily.
  • My take: If you’re passing through Naples anyway, it’s usually simpler to stay a night there and go direct from Naples for your Procida day trip.

From the Amalfi Coast

  • Ports: Positano or Sorrento
  • Travel time: Around 2 hours one way.
  • Reality check: You’ll likely pass through Naples and lose a big chunk of your day. Spend a night in Naples if you can to maximize time on your day trip to Procida.

How I got to Procida:

When I visited this region of Italy, I based myself in Naples, which made Procida an easy and super convenient day trip. I booked a ticket on the Caremar ferry in advance because I was traveling during high season and wanted to snag an early morning time slot – the earlier you arrive, the more time you have to soak up the island before the midday crowds (and heat) roll in. 

For reference, I booked an 8:55am hydrofoil there and a 8:15pm ferry back to Naples. This was the perfect amount of time on the island for me, and I didn’t have to wake up at the crack of dawn. 

Psst – if you book in advance, you’ll need to collect your boarding pass at the ticket office. Make sure to get there early (about 45 minutes or so, possibly more if you’re traveling during high season).

Something to note: there’s two ports in Naples (Molo Beverello and Calata Porta di Massa); make sure to go to the correct one. Don’t make the same mistake I did… Thankfully they’re only about a 15 minute walk from each other, but still annoying to first walk to the wrong one and then realize you actually needed the other… Make sure to look on your ticket to see which port your boat is leaving from. Whoops!

Ferry tips from my experience:

  • Book early if you’re visiting in peak season – the boats do in fact fill up.
  • Aim for an early morning boat so you can really stretch your time on the island and enjoy the quieter morning vibe.
  • Don’t forget to check the return schedule when you arrive – the last ferries back to Naples and Ischia are usually in the evening, and you don’t wanna get stranded (unless, of course, you secretly do want an excuse to stay overnight – can’t say I’d blame you).
  • Sit outside if the weather’s good – the sea breeze and the views of Vesuvius and the bay are worth the salty hair. Plus, I got to see a stunning sunset on the way back!

How to Get Around Procida 

I walked all around Procida, and honestly? It was a lot of walking – but totally worth it. The island is only about 4 square kilometers, so it’s doable, but those hills, stairs, and cobblestones will definitely give your legs a workout. Like I said earlier: wear comfortable shoes – your feet will thank you. I wore sandals and they were fine, but in hindsight sneakers would’ve been much better.

If you’d rather save your energy (or just want to see more without the sweat), you have a few other options:

  • Local Minibuses: The buses are small, frequent, and inexpensive (about €1.50–€2 per ride if you buy a ticket at a shop, slightly more if you pay onboard).
    • The main operator is EAV Bus, which runs several routes circling the island.
    • You’ll find bus stops near the ferry terminal at Marina Grande and throughout the island – just look for the signs marked with Fermata.
    • The most useful routes for visitors are usually the L1 and L2, which hit the main areas like Marina Grande, Chiaiolella, and Terra Murata.
  • Bikes & E-bikes: Several rental shops near the marina offer bicycles or electric bikes by the hour or day – a good middle ground if you don’t want to walk the whole island but still want to go at your own pace.
  • Scooters: You can also rent a scooter if you’re comfortable navigating the narrow streets. Just watch out for the sharp curves and steep bits!

When to Visit Procida

You can technically visit Procida year-round, but some months are definitely better than others depending on what kind of experience you’re after – and how hot (or cool) you like it.

I visited Procida at the end of June, and it was absolutely gorgeous — sunny skies, long days, and the island in full bloom. Yes, it was high season, but to be honest, it didn’t feel exceptionally busy — especially compared to the super crazy crowds I’d just left behind in Naples. 

Part of that, I think, was thanks to my early start: I caught the 8:55am ferry from Naples and arrived at Procida before 10am. The island felt like it was still waking up – the streets were quiet, shutters were just starting to open, and for a good hour or so I wandered peacefully, soaking it all in before more visitors arrived.

High Season (June – August)

This is when the island is at its liveliest – hot weather, everything open, and plenty of events and festivals. Daytime temps average around 28–32°C (82–90°F), with July and August being the hottest months. That said, if you plan well and arrive early like I did, it can still feel calm and magical, even at the peak of summer.

Shoulder Seasons (April – May & September – October)

If you can swing it, these are arguably the best months to visit. The weather is still warm and pleasant, but the crowds thin out a bit. Daytime temperatures are typically 18–24°C (64–75°F) in spring and 22–27°C (72–81°F) in early fall. Ferries are less hectic, and you’ll have more space to wander without bumping elbows at every viewpoint.

Winter (November – March)

The island quiets down considerably in winter. Some restaurants and shops close for the season, and ferry schedules are reduced. Daytime temperatures hover around 10–15°C (50–59°F), so it’s much cooler, but you’ll have the island almost entirely to yourself.

BUT (yes, of course there’s a but, haha), I honestly wouldn’t recommend going in winter if you want the true Procida experience. Most of the restaurants will be closed, and it’ll be far too chilly to go for a swim in the turquoise waters (my favorite!).

Also, ferries are less frequent from November to March, so just keep that in mind if you’re visiting in the low season.

Is a day trip to Procida worth it?

I can say without hesitation: yes – absolutely. My day trip to Procida ended up being one of my favorite days in all of Italy.

The island’s charm is undeniable – pastel-colored houses stacked above the sea, quiet little alleys, fresh seafood, and a vibe that feels worlds away from the chaos of Naples. But what really made it special for me were the locals. I found them to be incredibly welcoming and genuinely happy that visitors are discovering and appreciating their island. (Just remember to be respectful – this is their home, not just a backdrop for your Instagram.)

At one point, a local fisherman – an older gentleman with the most genuine, kindest smile – even invited me into his traditional fisherman’s home. I’ll admit, I was a little wary at first (being invited into a stranger’s house can feel a bit unexpected, especially as a solo female traveler!), but it turned out to be one of those magical travel moments I’ll never forget. He was so proud to show me around, pointing out family heirlooms and telling stories about his life on the island. 

He even shared that he’s turning his home into an Airbnb – a clear sign of how Procida is slowly shifting to welcome more tourism. Whether that’s good or bad… I’m not sure yet. But it was such a privilege to glimpse his life and see firsthand both the pride locals have in their island and the changes they’re adapting to. I’ll never forget his sweet smile!

So yes – if you’re in Naples or Ischia and want a day filled with authenticity, beauty, and maybe even a few surprises, Procida is 100% worth it.

Is One Day in Procida Enough?

I think so! One day is plenty to see the highlights – especially if you catch an early ferry and stay until sunset (like I did).

With one day in Procida, you’ll have time to:

  • Explore the two main marinas
  • See the island’s most spectacular viewpoint
  • Enjoy a leisurely meal and gelato
  • Circle the island via boat trip (plus some swimming!)
  • Even sneak in some beach time if you’re quick

Of course, if you fall in love with the vibe (very possible), you might find yourself wishing you had another day to just chill by the sea with a spritz. But for most travelers (including myself), a full day is the perfect amount of time to soak in Procida’s charm. To be honest, I think more than a day (or two) would be overkill, unless you want a few exceptionally chill days.

Brief History of Procida 

Procida’s story stretches back thousands of years – this tiny island has seen it all, from ancient Greek settlers to Roman emperors and beyond. Its strategic location in the Bay of Naples made it a valuable spot for fishermen, traders, and rulers alike.

Over the centuries, Procida was shaped by waves of invaders and settlers: the Greeks established early colonies here, then the Romans took over, using the island as a quiet retreat. During the Middle Ages, Procida became an important defensive outpost with fortresses built to protect against pirates and rival powers.

For much of its history, Procida remained a humble fishing village – generations of locals making their living from the sea, crafting colorful boats and preserving their unique traditions. It wasn’t until recently that the island started to attract tourists looking for a more authentic and peaceful alternative to nearby Capri.

Interestingly, Procida was named Italy’s Capital of Culture in 2022 – kind of like how Matera was named the European Capital of Culture in 2019. This honor is a nod to Procida’s rich heritage and vibrant local arts scene. It’s a place where history isn’t just locked away in museums – it’s alive in every sun-washed alley and seaside terrace.

Things To Do in Procida in One Day

If you’ve only got one day on this charming little island (like I did), here’s how to make the most of it – with plenty of time for wandering, eating, and soaking in Procida’s pastel-colored magic.

8:55am: Catch the Early Ferry from Naples

Start your day trip to Procida bright and early with the Caremar 8:55 a.m. ferry from Naples (what I did!). I recommend booking your ticket in advance if it’s high season – not just to secure a spot, but also to snag an early time slot so you can enjoy more of the island before the other day-trippers arrive. 

Remember – get to the ferry terminal BEFORE your ferry departure time. This is when it leaves, so you’ll wanna get there about 45 minutes beforehand.

Arriving at Procida just before 10am, I immediately noticed how calm and sleepy Procida felt compared to chaotic Naples – it was such a breath of fresh air and my body instantly relaxed. 

Naples does get a bad rep, and even though I’ve taken more than a dozen solo trips around the world and wasn’t exactly worried during my time in Naples, I’ll admit I still felt a bit apprehensive because of all the stories I’d heard. Stepping onto Procida, though, I felt that weight lift and found myself feeling much more carefree.

10am: Coffee & a Lingua di Procida near Marina Grande

Once you step off the ferry at Marina di Procida, pop into Pasticceria Bar Roma (right by the port) and start your day the Procidani way – with a lingua di Procida and a coffee. This flaky, lemon custard-filled pastry is light, tart, sweet, and absolutely perfect with an espresso. Since it was invented right here on the island, it feels only right to enjoy it at the start of your adventure!

Afterwards, stroll around the little shops – they were just starting to open once I arrived! Lots of cute lemony stuff to check out (too bad my suitcase was already stuffed).

10:30am: Explore Marina di Corricella

Make your way to Marina di Corricella, the dreamy, iconic pastel harbor you’ve probably seen in every Procida photo. I walked here on foot (comfy shoes highly recommended – lots of stairs and uneven cobblestones), and because I arrived so early, it was practically empty. The streets were quiet, shutters were still closed, and it felt like the island was just beginning to wake up – truly magical. 

Once the restaurants began to open up, I could totally see why everyone is beyond obsessed with this idyllic little port. It’s just so adorable and picturesque! Truly the icon of Procida, and it’s oh so colorful (which I just love). 

This is also where I met that sweet older fisherman I was telling you about before!

While in Corricella, grab a lemon granita (I got mine at Chiaro di Luna cocktail bar e Gelateria Artigianale) and just sit by the water for a bit, soaking in the scene of fishing boats, colorful balconies, and locals going about their day. And wave to the fisherman — they’re so friendly!

12pm: Visit Casale Vascello

Head inland to find Casale Vascello, a tucked-away courtyard surrounded by historic homes with arched staircases, painted doors, and that timeless village vibe. It’s peaceful and worth a quick wander before lunch.

1pm: Lunch With a View

Lunch is an event here, and you have two excellent options:

  • If you’re more organized than me and made a reservation, head to La Lampara. This spot has some of the best views on the island, overlooking Corricella, with fantastic seafood, pasta, house wine, and a truly dreamy tiramisu.
  • If you didn’t book ahead (like me), don’t worry – I ended up at Il Pescatore and loved it. It’s right on the harbor, with views of the fishing boats and a breezy, relaxed vibe. The spaghetti al limone blew me away (my new favorite pasta dish), and their refreshing lemon salad – their specialty – was just what I needed.

2:30pm: Climb to Panoramica sulla Corricella

Next, make your way to one of the best viewpoints on the island: Panoramica sulla Corricella. The climb is pretty steep to be honest with lots of stairs (or you can catch the C2 bus from the port if you’d rather save your legs), but the view of the harbor below is worth every step – this is the best view of Procida in my opinion. Whatever you do, don’t miss this.

And it was way less crowded than I thought it’d be!

I admit I got a little lost with all the climbing (it’s hard to know exactly which steps to actually climb), but I eventually made it! And found some extra views I originally wouldn’t have along the way!

If you’re feeling adventurous, continue walking up to Palazzo D’Avalos, a faded but fascinating former palace and prison that’s being renovated. Even if the building itself isn’t much to see up close, the sea views from here are beautiful. 

I walked up and didn’t really think it was worth it (I was already pretty sweaty and hot), but you be the judge yourself!

3:30pm: See Procida by Boat

The perfect way to wind down your day is with a boat tour around the island. This is the exact boat tour I went on, and it was beyond fantastic. This is one of the best ways to see the island for sure. Honestly, I’d even say it was the highlight of my day.

Domenico, the skipper, was not only extremely kind, knowledgeable, and professional, but his boat was immaculate and extremely beautiful (and he’s not too bad looking himself, wink wink). We stopped at beautiful, hidden swimming spots with the most turquoise water I never would’ve found on my own, and of course seeing the island from the sea felt so special.

We cruised past landmarks like the Palazzo D’Avalos perched on its cliff, the Cave of the Marine Ox in Punta dei Monaci, Carbonchio Bay, the Bourbon Palace, Chiaiozza and its natural pool, Vivara Island, Postman Beach (Pozzovecchio), and the Punta Pioppeto Lighthouse. 

I chose the 3:30pm start time so I could explore the island in the morning and relax on the water in the afternoon – it was the perfect way to balance the day.

6pm: Gelato Before You Go

After docking back at the port, cap off your perfect day the Italian way – with a scoop (or two) of gelato. There’s plenty of little gelaterias near the ferry terminal, so grab a cone, stroll along the waterfront, and savor every bite. Because let’s be honest – no perfect day in Italy is complete without a gelato.

7 or 8pm (depending on month visited): Sunset Ferry Back

End your day by catching a ferry back to Naples at sunset. I got lucky and watched the sky turn shades of pink and gold over the Bay of Naples from the deck – the perfect, dreamy ending to an already unforgettable day.

More Things to Do in Procida (If You Have Extra Time)

If you’re lucky enough to move at a slower pace – or just want a few alternatives to the main itinerary – here are some extra ideas to round out your day:

Walk to Vivara Island

Connected to Procida by a small pedestrian bridge, Vivara Island is a protected nature reserve that feels wonderfully wild. It’s full of Mediterranean plants and birds, and because visitor numbers are limited, it’s incredibly peaceful. (Check ahead to see if it’s open during your visit – it’s sometimes closed seasonally or for maintenance.)

Lounge on a Beach

To be honest, the beaches on Procida didn’t wow me at all (those in Puglia, Cinque Terre, and even Croatia are way more my style). 

But if you’re craving sand between your toes, head to Spiaggia di Pozzo Vecchio (Postman’s Beach) – a quiet black-sand beach made famous by Il Postino. Or check out Chiaiolella Beach, which is bigger and livelier, perfect for a quick swim or people-watching.

Visit a Church

Pop into Abbazia San Michele Arcangelo, up near Terra Murata, for a peek at Procida’s spiritual heart. The church is dedicated to the island’s patron saint, and the views from up there are spectacular.



The post Day Trip to Procida from Naples: How to Spend One Perfect Day on Italy’s Pastel Paradise appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/procida-day-trip/feed/ 0
My Florence to San Marino Day Trip: Medieval Towers, Hilltop Views, and Zero Crowds https://apassionandapassport.com/florence-to-san-marino-day-trip/ https://apassionandapassport.com/florence-to-san-marino-day-trip/#respond Thu, 02 Oct 2025 01:56:44 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32757 Planning a day trip from Florence to San Marino? You’re in for a seriously underrated adventure. This tiny mountaintop country might be one of the world’s oldest republics, but it’s also one of the most charming (and photogenic) spots I visited during my time in Florence. Picture dramatic stone towers, sweeping hillside views, cobblestone alleys,Continue Reading

The post My Florence to San Marino Day Trip: Medieval Towers, Hilltop Views, and Zero Crowds appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Planning a day trip from Florence to San Marino? You’re in for a seriously underrated adventure. This tiny mountaintop country might be one of the world’s oldest republics, but it’s also one of the most charming (and photogenic) spots I visited during my time in Florence. Picture dramatic stone towers, sweeping hillside views, cobblestone alleys, and (bonus!) hardly any crowds.

In this post, I’m breaking down everything you need to know for a seamless trip from Florence to San Marino – including how to get there, what to do, where to eat, and all the must-see spots in just one day. If you’re looking for something unique and off the usual Italy itinerary, this is 100% it.

San Marino feels straight out of a fairytale. You’ve got medieval castles perched high on a ridgeline, winding streets that look like movie sets, and panoramic views that go on forever. Throw in a few cozy cafes, local shops, and a relaxed, low-key vibe, and I was sold.

Honestly, before planning my Florence itinerary, I hadn’t even heard of San Marino (kinda embarrassing, but hey, here we are). But once I saw how close it was, I couldn’t resist. I was SO close to hitting 50 countries and knew I had to squeeze this one in. And I’m so glad I did – how often do you get to casually pop into another country for the day?

Turns out, San Marino is actually one of the least-visited countries in the entire world. It’s also the third smallest in Europe (after Vatican City and Monaco), completely surrounded by Italy but 100% its own thing. You won’t need a passport to get in, but you’ll definitely want your camera. Think mountaintop hikes, ancient fortresses, and some seriously jaw-dropping views. San Marino totally caught me off guard in the best way.

A Little About San Marino

If you’re anything like me, you probably hadn’t even heard of San Marino before planning your Florence itinerary. I had no idea this teeny tiny mountaintop country even existed – let alone that it’s one of the oldest republics in the world. We’re talking way back in the year 301.

So, if you’re interested in learning a bit about San Marino, here’s the quick version: San Marino is its own country – not a town, not a province, not a quirky part of Italy. It’s completely surrounded by Italy but has stayed totally independent for over 1,700 years. It was started by a stonemason named Marinus who fled religious persecution and set up a little mountaintop community on Monte Titano. And somehow, despite popes, Napoleon, wars, and even Mussolini, San Marino held onto its independence and managed to never get swallowed up by Italy. Wild, right? 

Today, it still has its own government, postage stamps, and even border control (though it’s super chill and you won’t even need to show your passport if you’re coming from Italy). It uses the euro and feels very European… just in a “wait, I’m in a different country right now?” kind of way.

It’s super tiny – the third smallest country in Europe tiny – but full of quirky history, sweeping views, and that charming old-world vibe. Definitely not just another hilltop town (although I loved the ones we visited on our Puglia road trip!).

Is a Florence to San Marino Day Trip Worth It?

I think so! Despite kinda being a hassle to get to (there’s no direct train or bus and zero organized tours at this time), I’m so glad I made the effort to get to San Marino. On public transportation from Florence (practically the only way to get there), it takes almost 4 hours… so… decide ahead of time if you’re willing to make the trek. I’ll be going into detail about how to get there shortly.

Logistics for Taking a Florence to San Marino Day Trip

Where is San Marino

San Marino is a tiny independent country (the fifth smallest country on Earth – just under 24 square miles in size) completely landlocked by Italy, tucked away in the northeastern part of the Italian peninsula. It sits on the slopes of Mount Titano, about 3 hours southeast of Florence by car and roughly 30 – 45 minutes from the Adriatic coast. The closest big Italian city is Rimini, a lively coastal spot just 30 – 45 minutes away. 

How to Get From Florence to San Marino

So here’s the thing – San Marino doesn’t have its own train station or airport, so you can’t just hop on a direct train or flight into the country. Nope, this tiny hilltop republic makes you work for it a little (but hey, that’s half the fun, right?).

Driving: You’ve got a few options, but driving is definitely one of them. If you’re renting a car, it’s about 250 km (or 155 miles) from Florence to San Marino – roughly a 3-hour drive, depending on traffic. Totally doable as a day trip if you’re up for some highway time!

Public Transportation: First things first, just know it’s gonna take a few hours (unless you’re taking a ridiculously expensive taxi). Therefore, plan to leave early! For reference, I left Florence on a 6:55am train  (yes, 6:55 in the morning) and didn’t make it to San Marino until 10:30am. So practically 4 hours when you consider I had to first get myself to the train station in Florence. 

Do note there’s no direct transport from Florence to San Marino, so everyone will need to get to Rimini first (where there’s a bus straight to San Marino). If you’re staying in Florence and doing a day trip to San Marino like I was, you’ll need to transfer through Bologna to reach Rimini (train from Florence to Bologna, then train from Bologna to Rimini). It sounds pretty tricky but I promise you once you read the steps outlined before, it’s honestly pretty easy.

You can buy train and bus tickets on the day of, but I didn’t wanna have to deal with that before such a long journey, so I decided to buy them in advance. Whatever I can do to make my traveling easier I typically do, including buying transport tickets beforehand if possible (and sometimes it’s cheaper by doing this!).

Here’s exactly how you’ll get from Florence to San Marino (and exactly what I did):

  • Step 1: Train from Florence to Bologna. Take a fast train from Florence Santa Maria Novella to Bologna Centrale (about 35 minutes). I took the 6:55am Frecciarossa train and arrived at Bologna at 7:28am.
  • Step 2: Train from Bologna to Rimini. From Bologna Centrale, hop on another train to Rimini – it takes around 1.5 hours. I took the 8am InterCity and got to Rimini at 9:11am.
  • Step 3: Bonelli Bus from Rimini to San Marino. Time to get over the border! Catch the Bonelli bus from Rimini to San Marino (roughly 50 minutes). The bus stop in Rimini is right in front of the Napoleon Hotel, just a 3-minute walk from the train station. You’ll find plenty of other travelers waiting here, and the bus is really comfy! I took a 9:45am bus from Rimini to San Marino and arrived in San Marino at 10:33am. Told ya it’s a long trek!

I strongly recommend buying your bus ticket online beforehand (that’s what I did) or at the ticket office across the street from the train station in Rimini. Buying tickets on the bus isn’t the best idea – my bus was pretty full (actually pretty packed!), and I saw people get turned away and forced to wait for the next one. When I visited, the bus fare was 6 euros each way. Check out the latest schedule on the official bus website.

You’ll return back to Florence the same way you came! First with a bus from San Marino to Rimini, a train from Rimini to Bologna Centrale), and finally, another train from Bologna to Florence SMN. And yup, it takes just as long, haha. But you’ll quickly realize that although it seems like a complicated journey, it’s actually pretty simple once you start!

Psst: CARRY A PORTABLE PHONE BATTERY. I cannot stress this enough. Travel alone will take over 7 hours (3.5 hours each way), so you don’t wanna get stuck without any battery! Especially if your train and bus tickets are on your phone (I recommend printing them out juuuuust in case)!

How to Get Around San Marino

San Marino is tiny – like, walk-everywhere tiny. Once you get off the bus from Rimini, you’ll be dropped off right at the base of the historic center (also called San Marino City), and from there, it’s all on foot. Just be prepared to walk a lot; I think I walked over 20k steps that day despite sitting on the train/bus for over 7 hours!

And yes, I wore a dress, but I made sure to wear comfy sneakers for that very reason.

The old town is perched on a hilltop and full of cobblestone streets, narrow alleys, and epic views – not exactly car-friendly, but perfect for wandering. Everything you’ll want to see (like the Three Towers, the main squares, and all the cute little shops and cafes) is within walking distance. Just wear comfy shoes – there’s plenty of hills and stairs to climb (but I promise the views are worth it).

If you’re staying overnight and your hotel is farther from the center, there’s a local cable car that connects the lower town of Borgo Maggiore with the old town. It runs frequently and takes just a couple of minutes – plus, you get sweeping views on the way up!

Basically: no rental car, no Uber, no taxis needed. Your feet (and maybe the cable car) will get you everywhere you want to go.

When to Take a Day Trip to San Marino

San Marino is beautiful year-round, but if you’re aiming for clear skies, fewer crowds, and sweeping views (aka the dream combo), here’s what to keep in mind.

For reference, I took a day trip from Florence to San Marino in late June, and had practically perfect weather!

While it was hot, it was totally doable – just bring water and take breaks in the shade when you need to. July and August are peak tourist season, so expect more crowds and tour groups, especially midday. If you can, go on a weekday to avoid the weekend rush (and snap your pics without random tourists in the background, ha).

Spring (April – June) and early fall (September – October) are really the sweet spots: fewer people, still warm and sunny, and the views from the towers are crystal clear on a good day. Winter can be chilly and foggy, and some restaurants or attractions might have limited hours – plus, you’ll miss out on those iconic views if it’s super overcast.

Other Tips and FAQS about a Day Trip to San Marino

Fun Facts About San Marino

  • It’s really small. Like, blink-and-you-miss-it small. San Marino is the 5th smallest country in the world, and you can drive across it in under an hour.
  • They have their own army. Yep – this teeny country has a teeny army. It’s mostly ceremonial now, but they’ve got guards in fancy uniforms and everything.
  • You can get your passport stamped. Even though there’s no official border crossing, San Marino will happily stamp your passport for a few euros at the tourism office. It’s the cutest little souvenir. Stop by the visitor center/tourist office at the bottom of Monte Titano.
  • San Marino stayed neutral in both World Wars. Talk about minding your own business, haha. They even offered Hitler asylum (yikes), but then took in thousands of refugees from surrounding areas. So… mixed history there.
  • It’s tax-free heaven. Because it’s not part of the EU, people come here to shop tax-free. Expect perfume, watches, and leather bags galore.
  • They vote for two presidents. Every six months. Yes, six. They’re called Captains Regent, and it’s clearly been working for them.
  • It’s named after a real guy. Saint Marinus, a stonemason who became a saint and founded the country. Hence, San Marino! 

Frequently Asked Questions

How Long to Spend in San Marino: While you can easily spend all day in San Marino, especially if you wanna take advantage of all the quirky little museums, I spent around 5-6 hours wandering around and that was sufficient for me! 

Crowds in San Marino: A day trip from Florence to San Marino isn’t exactly on everyone’s Italy itinerary, so thankfully I found the crowds to be super manageable. Even during the high season in summer. A visit in the shoulder season (March to May and September to November) will be even less busy!  

Is English spoken? The official language in San Marino is Italian – everything from menus to street signs is in it. But thanks to the steady stream of tourists, English is fairly common, especially in restaurants, shops, and among younger locals. You won’t have trouble getting around if you don’t speak Italian, but it never hurts to learn a few basics (like ciao and grazie)! 

Fun fact: Although Sammarinese speak Italian, they’re exceptionally proud of their culture. So don’t call them Italians! San Marino also has its own traditional dialect – the Sammarinese variety of Romagnol. It’s mostly spoken by the older generation, and sadly, it’s now endangered. Linguists estimate it could go extinct after 2040 if preservation efforts don’t step in. So while you’ll likely never hear it on your visit, it’s a unique part of the country’s cultural identity.

Is a day trip to San Marino expensive? Honestly, not really! Even though you’re technically crossing into a whole new country (which sounds fancy), it’s actually super doable on a budget. The roundtrip bus from Rimini only cost me €12, and entry to the towers and museums is just a few euros each. Wandering the medieval streets, checking out the views, and snapping pics? Totally free. Plus, there’s plenty of restaurants and cafes where you can grab a meal without breaking the bank. 

That said, the roundtrip train ticket from Florence was a bit pricier than I expected – around €75 total. But considering it got me halfway across Italy and into a new country in just a few hours? Still 100% worth it in my book. I think I spent about €120 for the whole day (transport there and back, food, etc), and for a spontaneous border hop into one of the smallest countries in the world? Not bad at all.

Things to do in San Marino in One Day

Hike Between the Three Towers

This is the main thing to do on any Florence to San Marino day trip. And my favorite part of my visit! The trails are short but super scenic, and you’re never far from sweeping mountain views or stone pathways that look like something out of a fairy tale. Definitely do the first two towers and hike between them – skip the third unless you’re feeling very ambitious and the weather is cool. 

Psst – there’s free access to towers and museums for teachers, so bring your school staff ID!!! It was such a pleasant surprise when I was at the ticket counter about to purchase my entrance fee and didn’t have to. I love when places recognize the work teachers do! And in this case, an entire country! Thank you San Marino!

Here’s a bit about each one:

Rocca della Guaita (Prima Torre/First Tower)

This is the biggest and most iconic of San Marino’s three towers – and honestly, the main reason I took a day trip to San Marino! It’s the oldest stone fortress in the country (built way back in the 11th century!) and looks like something out of a medieval movie. Super photogenic, especially from the outside. Prima Torre (the First Tower) is even on the national flag AND the coat of arms of San Marino. Plus, it’s been a World Heritage Site since 2008!

From the top, you can see the other two towers, the surrounding countryside, and even the Adriatic Sea far off in the distance. PLUS the coastal (Italian) city of Rimini. If you can, go as high as you can within the tower – there’s some steep stairs and even a ladder at the end, but if you’re able, definitely go for it. It looked a bit nerve wracking at first but I made it up (and then back down).

Pretty amazing if you ask me! So many panoramic views! I loved exploring the small St. Barbara’s Chapel, the watchtower, and the bell tower. 

I explored the inside too (it’s a small museum now). Bring your camera for this one; it’s the one that pops up in all the postcards for a reason. So much history and architecture over here.

Once you’re done exploring Guaita (the first tower), continue on the path towards Cesta, the second tower.

Cesta Tower (Second Tower)

You can actually hike over to this one from the first tower – it’s not far and the walk is really scenic, with views all along the way and so many butterflies flying around (which I loved). The second tower is also a museum (Museum of Ancient Arms) and honestly worth the stop if you’re already on your way. Inside you’ll see everything from ancient weapons, uniforms, suits of armor, experimental weapons, and even prototypes. 

Most people say the first tower has the best views, but I have to disagree. I give that prize to Cesta, the second tower, simply because you actually get views of Guaita (which is impossible from Guaita itself, haha). Plus, it’s the highest at 755 meters above sea level!

Montale Tower (Third Tower)

Yeah… I’ll be real with you – skip this one. The Third Tower is the least impressive of all three. The hike there and back was super hot and tiring (through the forest on uneven cobblestone), and the tower itself isn’t even open to the public (and it’s the smallest of the three). No museum, no epic views like the others. Unless you’re dying for the extra exercise, it’s not worth the (long-ish) detour in the heat in my opinion.

Quirky Museums + Other Fun Finds in San Marino

While the Three Towers are definitely the star of the show, there’s more to explore in San Marino’s hilltop old town – especially if you’re into offbeat museums, scenic plazas, and casual wandering.

You’ll find a handful of quirky, bite-sized museums scattered throughout the historic center. If you’ve got extra time (or just want to escape the sun for a bit), check out the Museum of Curiosities, filled with odd inventions and fun facts from around the world. It’s weird in a good way, and perfect if you’re visiting with kids or just enjoy random, obscure trivia.

San Marino also has a surprisingly dark side when it comes to museums – think the Museum of Torture, the Vampire Museum, and the Wax Museum. These aren’t for everyone, but they definitely add some edge to what might otherwise feel like a super quaint day. Personally, I opted out of the museums, but they’re popular with visitors who enjoy that kind of morbid history. And it’s a great way to get outta the scorching sun.

A bit more traditional is the State Museum, home to local archaeological finds and cultural artifacts. It’s small, but a nice way to get a feel for San Marino’s incredibly long history – this is the world’s oldest republic, after all.

Piazza della Liberta + Palazzo Pubblico

Don’t miss Piazza della Liberta, one of the prettiest corners of the old town. This is where you’ll find the Palazzo Pubblico, aka San Marino’s government building. Stick around for the changing of the guard, which takes place every 30 minutes during the summer months – it’s surprisingly formal for such a tiny country, and definitely worth seeing if you’re already in the area. I somehow missed this on my day trip to San Marino (I was probably too busy oohing and aahing at all the views from the towers!).

Local tip: There’s free public wi-fi throughout this area, which is super helpful if you need to check transit times, download offline maps, or pull up a digital ticket (like I did). 

Views, Views, and More Views

Honestly, one of the best things to do in San Marino is just wander. The entire old town is perched on a mountain ridge, so you’ll find sweeping views around every corner – on a clear day, you can see all the way to the Adriatic Sea! 

It reminded me a little of Sintra in Portugal, but with far fewer crowds and a more mellow vibe. No colorful palaces here, but the pale stone buildings, medieval atmosphere, and quiet charm really grew on me. I’d take this over the chaos of more popular spots any day.

Shopping and Cafes

San Marino is duty-free, so if you’re into shopping, you might find some good deals – especially on leather goods, watches, perfume, and alcohol. That said, the old town shops are mostly geared toward tourists, and while it’s fun to browse, don’t expect super unique or artisanal products. Still, it’s worth poking around the side streets where prices tend to be lower and crowds thinner.

There’s also no shortage of cafes and casual wine bars, many with outdoor seating and dreamy views. It’s the perfect place to stop for a cappuccino, a quick piadina (local flatbread sandwich), or an Aperol spritz. I had a delicious bowl of pasta overlooking the countryside before heading back to Florence (for even more pasta, haha). 

So there ya have it, exactly how to do a day trip to San Marino from Florence! Overall, all good things to say about the tiny Republic of San Marino. Although, I think one visit is most likely enough, haha (meaning I won’t be making the long trek next time I’m in Italy). 

The post My Florence to San Marino Day Trip: Medieval Towers, Hilltop Views, and Zero Crowds appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/florence-to-san-marino-day-trip/feed/ 0
One Week in Provence Itinerary: The Perfect Provence Road Trip https://apassionandapassport.com/one-week-in-provence-itinerary/ https://apassionandapassport.com/one-week-in-provence-itinerary/#respond Mon, 22 Sep 2025 06:05:25 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32633 Headed to the South of France and looking to visit Provence? Here’s the ultimate week in Provence itinerary guide! If you’ve been dreaming of lavender fields, medieval villages, and maybe a little seaside time on the French Riviera, Provence is your spot. It’s one of those places that feels straight out of a painting –Continue Reading

The post One Week in Provence Itinerary: The Perfect Provence Road Trip appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to the South of France and looking to visit Provence? Here’s the ultimate week in Provence itinerary guide!

If you’ve been dreaming of lavender fields, medieval villages, and maybe a little seaside time on the French Riviera, Provence is your spot. It’s one of those places that feels straight out of a painting – hilltop towns, vineyards, and rosé practically on tap. Such a dreamy area, and one I was super eager to finally visit!

You could easily spend months exploring the region, but if you’ve only got 5 days to a week in Provence, don’t worry – I’ve got you covered. This itinerary blends the best of the area: those iconic rolling lavender fields (if you’re here in season), charming villages perched on cliffs, long lunches with a glass of local wine, vibrant markets, and even a taste of the coast (including kayaking at the Calanques). We spent a week roadtripping Provence and it was one of our best trips yet! I just loved that laid-back sensory-rich lifestyle.

Here’s exactly how I spent my very own week in Provence, plus plenty of tips to help you craft an epic trip of your own.

Week in Provence Itinerary Logistics 

Where is Provence 

Provence isn’t just one town – it’s an entire region in the southeast of France, tucked between the Rhône River and the Mediterranean Sea. It stretches from the foothills of the Alps down to the coastline of the French Riviera, which means you’ll find everything from lavender fields and vineyards to sun-soaked fishing villages and seaside cliffs.

Provence is part of the larger Provence-Alpes-Côte d’Azur (PACA) region, which also includes the French Riviera cities like Nice, Cannes, and Monaco, as well as the Alpine towns farther north. In terms of location, it’s north of Marseille, west of the French Riviera, and just a few hours by train from Paris, making it easy to add to a France itinerary.

The area is made up of dozens of towns and villages, each with its own character – from larger cultural hubs like Avignon and Aix-en-Provence to tiny medieval hill towns like Gordes and Roussillon, and coastal gems like Cassis. The magic of Provence is that you don’t just stick to one spot – you road trip (or train hop) your way around, stringing together a mix of cities, villages, and countryside.

How to Get to Provence 

For your Provence itinerary, you’ll of course need to get there first! And thankfully, getting to Provence is easier than you might think – and you have a few options depending on where you’re coming from. The region is served by several airports, with Marseille Provence Airport being the biggest and most convenient for most travelers. You can also fly into Nice Côte d’Azur Airport if you want to start your trip along the French Riviera, or Avignon’s small airport for a quieter, more central entry point.

If you’re coming from Paris, trains are a great option. The high-speed TGV can get you to Avignon, Aix-en-Provence, or Marseille in around 3 hours, which is perfect if you want to skip the hassle of airports and rental cars for the start of your trip. 

Speaking of cars – renting a car is highly recommended if you want to explore the smaller villages and countryside, since public transport doesn’t reach all the hill towns and lavender fields.

Provence is also easy to reach by car from other parts of France – it’s a 2 – 3 hour drive from Lyon or Montpellier and just under 10 hours from Paris if you prefer a scenic road trip. Once you’re there, having a car gives you the freedom to hop between villages, vineyards, and viewpoints at your own pace – which is honestly the best way to experience the region.

We were coming from Cinque Terre, which ended up being a super long travel day. We took the train from Monterosso to Genoa (where we got some much-needed snacks), then hopped on another train from Genoa to Nice, with a short stop in Ventimiglia along the way. We finally picked up our rental car in Nice and finished the journey to Provence. 

It took over eight hours, multiple train changes, and a 2 hour drive. Combining Cinque Terre with my Provence itinerary and the French Riviera probably wasn’t the best idea I’ve ever had, but hey – we made it work! Just know it can be done!

How to Get Around Provence 

Renting a Car

As I noted above, renting a car is by far the easiest way to explore Provence, especially if you wanna hit the hilltop villages, lavender fields, and vineyards at your own pace. I mean, it’s a Provence road trip afterall! Driving gives you the freedom to wander down winding country roads, stop at viewpoints, and explore towns that aren’t easy to reach by public transport. Honestly, it’s one of the best ways to experience the region.

The beauty of Provence is that you don’t just stay in one place. Instead, you hop around, exploring one postcard-perfect town after another, which makes it the perfect destination for a road trip.

Psst – I like to search this site to see what supplier has the best deal going on. Also, remember to double check if the car is manual or automatic transmission – many cars in Europe are manual. They’re typically less expensive than renting an automatic, but only rent one if you can actually drive one!

Driving in Provence: Roads in Provence are generally well-maintained, but many of the smaller villages have narrow, cobblestone streets and limited parking, so be prepared to park outside the center and walk in. Roundabouts are common, and locals drive fast, so a little patience goes a long way. 

There were a few moments when we drove down really tiny, winding streets (like crazy narrow), and we honestly weren’t sure we’d make it through. My husband handled all the driving on our Provence road trip – and let’s just say I’m really glad he’s a better driver than I am!

Guided Day Tours

Don’t wanna rent a car? No problem – you can still see plenty of this Provence itinerary. Base yourself in a larger town like Aix-en-Provence (my choice) or Avignon and book guided day tours. These tours often cover multiple villages or scenic routes, such as lavender fields during the blooming season. 

Many tours also include wine tastings, local markets, or historical sites, providing a comprehensive experience without the need for a car. Definitely book in advance if you’re visiting during high season (these tours are popular for a reason!). 

Here’s a few guided day tours that I would have booked if we didn’t rent a car:

Trains and Regional Buses

There’s also trains and regional buses connecting the larger towns, which work well if you’re sticking mostly to cities and a few nearby villages.

  • ZOU! Regional Bus Network: Operated by the Provence-Alpes-Côte d’Azur Region, ZOU! offers extensive bus services connecting towns and villages across the region. These buses are ideal for reaching destinations not served by trains. 
  • TER Sud Provence-Alpes-Côte d’Azur: The regional train network, known as TER (Transport Express Régional), connects major cities like Marseille, Aix-en-Provence, Avignon, and Nice. These trains are convenient for intercity travel and accessing nearby towns. 

But to be completely honest, a Provence road trip really is the way to go. I’d only opt for day tours and public transit if driving is definitely not a possibility. 

When to Plan Your Provence Itinerary 

Spring (March – May): Spring is a beautiful time to visit if you want mild weather and fewer crowds. Daytime temperatures usually range from 55–70°F (13–21°C), perfect for exploring villages and countryside without the summer heat.

Summer (June – August): Summer is peak season in Provence, and LAVENDER season (typically from late June to mid July)! Daytime highs can reach 85–95°F (29–35°C), especially inland, so be prepared for intense heat (and slather on that sunscreen). Coastal areas along the French Riviera are slightly cooler (hooray!) but busier (womp womp).

A note on lavender season: If seeing lavender fields is a priority during your week in Provence (like it was for me!), aim for late June through mid July, depending on the year. The most famous fields are around Valensole Plateau, Luberon, and Sault, so plan your route accordingly. Depending on the heat, some lavender fields will be harvested earlier than others, so you may need to drive around to find patches still in bloom.

For reference, I planned our Provence itinerary for early July and had really great weather! Yes, it was hot, especially inland, and we unfortunately came across a lot of bees at our hotel pools, but it didn’t stop us from enjoying the sun-soaked afternoons, relaxing by the pool, and exploring nearby villages. And it was peak lavender season, meaning tons of time in the fields and lots of lavender ice cream!

Fall (September – October): I kinda wish we visited in early fall (although I am glad we got to see the stunning lavender fields). Temps range from 65–80°F (18–27°C), still warm enough for outdoor meals and wine tasting, while the crowds thin out and vineyards are busy with harvest season.

Winter (November – February): Winters are quiet and peaceful. Daytime highs usually sit around 50–60°F (10–16°C), while nights can drop into the 30s–40s°F (0–5°C). It’s too cold for lavender or beach days, but perfect for exploring villages and cultural sites without the crowds, plus accommodations are often cheaper.

Is a week in Provence enough?

I certainly think so! Our Provence itinerary was exactly a week, and we were able to visit half a dozen villages and charming cities, go market shopping, run through the lavender fields, go paddleboating on the stunning Verdon Gorge, and eat to our hearts’ content. I was satisfied with our time there and don’t feel like we missed anything major. 

The region is much larger than most people realize (with over 400 towns/villages), so don’t expect to visit each and every one with only a week in Provence. You’ll likely need over a month to even scratch the surface! I’ve included the ones we visited, but just know there are SO many Provence itinerary iterations you’ll come across on your research. I recommend a combination of small towns and larger cities so you don’t get bored, and of course a little time on the Mediterranean (my favorite)! 

If you want to shorten this Provence road trip to 5 days, I’d stick to Moustiers-Sainte-Marie and L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue (and the areas nearby). This gives you a perfect balance of nature, countryside drives, and charming villages, without feeling rushed.

But I really recommend a full week in Provence so you can add Cassis at the end for a taste of the Mediterranean, cliffside views, and a few relaxing beach or harbor hours!

Where to Stay in Provence 

Choosing a home base for your Provence itinerary really depends on the kind of trip you want to have – whether you’re chasing villages, vineyards, or the coast. One of the joys of Provence is that you don’t have to stay in just one place, and splitting your time between a couple of towns makes a road trip much easier.

I recommend splitting up your week in Provence into 2-3 bases from which you can explore the region. This makes it easy to see a mix of villages, countryside, and even the coast without feeling like you’re spending all your time in the car (the absolute worst).

Some hotels are absolutely gorgeous, and come with a hefty price tag. I recommend thinking about how much time you wanna enjoy the hotels, or if you’d rather be out exploring. We stayed in modest places for this trip, but I think I’d prefer splurging a bit more next time and give us time to soak in the charm and relax. This trip was very go-go-go, and while I’m glad we got to see and do so much, sometimes our bodies just crave rest (at a nice hotel with a stunning pool, haha)!

For our 7-day Provence road trip, we stayed in three separate areas and took day trips from each:

  • Moustiers-Sainte-Marie: Perfect if you want to wake up to lavender fields and hilltop village views. Staying here gave us that quintessential Provence experience, though accommodations are usually smaller boutique hotels or guesthouses rather than large resorts (which is totally cool with me!).
  • L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue: To be completely honest, we didn’t love our stay here. It was a bit too sleepy for us, we didn’t book a great place to stay (better options listed below), and in hindsight, we wish we had stayed in the much larger Aix-en-Provence instead. That said, it’s still a charming town with markets, canals, and cafés if you enjoy a slower pace. And a great base to visit other towns in the Luberon, like Gordes, Roussillon, etc.
  • Cassis: If you’re extending your Provence trip to 7 days, consider a night or two on the coast. Cassis is perfect for harbor-side walks, boat rides, and cliffside viewpoints, and you can find hotels or guesthouses with sea views and pools for a relaxing finale.
    • HPC Suites – Cassis Centre (10 minute walk to the beach, full kitchen access, and views over Cassis harbor)
    • L’Âme Bleue (beachfront apartment with 2 bedrooms and 2 bathrooms – perfect for a family!)
    • Seaview.Cassis (apartment with stunning sea views and direct beachfront access)

Other great towns to consider for your bases include Avignon, which offers a mix of city vibes and easy access to nearby villages, or Aix-en-Provence, perfect for culture lovers, foodies, and market wanderers. Regardless, I think you should split your time between larger towns and smaller villages.

Other Tips for Visiting Provence  

  • Currency: Provence is in France, so you’ll need euros (€). ATMs are widely available in towns, but smaller villages may not have easy access, so it’s good to have some cash on hand.
  • Carry cash for markets: Many local markets and small shops still prefer cash, especially for small purchases like fresh produce, cheese, or flowers. Bring a mix of coins and bills just in case.
  • Check market days in advance: Each town has its own schedule, and some markets only happen on specific days of the week. Planning ahead ensures you don’t miss the best local food and artisan goods. 
  • Markets often close mid-afternoon: Most markets in Provence start in the morning and wrap up by early afternoon (usually around 1 – 2 PM). Plan your visits accordingly if you want the full experience.
  • Language: French is the official language. English is spoken in larger tourist areas, but in small villages or local shops, it’s helpful to know a few basic phrases like bonjour (hello), merci (thank you), s’il vous plaît (please), and parlez-vous anglais? (do you speak English?).
  • Timing and crowds: Popular towns and lavender fields can get busy in summer (like, really busy), especially late June – early August. Start your days early to beat the crowds and get the best photos.
  • Be mindful of siesta hours: Some smaller shops and restaurants may close for a few hours in the afternoon, usually between 12:30–3:30 PM, so plan your shopping and meals around that.
  • Reservations for popular restaurants: Especially in summer, restaurants in smaller villages and towns can fill up quickly. Making a reservation ahead of time is definitely a good idea. If there’s anywhere you’re dying to eat at, check if they take reservations. If they do, make it ASAP once you know your dates.
  • Wear comfortable shoes: Many villages have cobblestone streets, stairs, and uneven paths, so bring sturdy, comfortable shoes for walking. With that being said, if you’ve got a stroller, be prepared to carry it up and down stairs (or bring a baby carrier instead).
  • Driving tips: If you’re renting a car, remember that many villages have narrow streets and limited parking, so plan to park outside the village center and walk in.
  • Bees near lavender: If visiting lavender fields, especially in peak bloom, watch out for bees. They’re usually harmless but can be persistent.

What to Eat in Provence 

Provence is a food lover’s dream – fresh, vibrant, and full of flavor. It was one of the things I was most excited for when visiting! Don’t miss ratatouille, tapenade, aioli, local cheeses, and olives, and if you’re a wine fan, make time for rosé from the vineyards. 

Markets are perfect for grabbing fresh bread, buttery croissants, seasonal fruits, ripe tomatoes, heirloom vegetables, nuts, and local charcuterie. You can even pick up lavender honey, artisan jams, or handmade pastries for a snack on the go. Small local restaurants serve hearty, traditional dishes that are perfect after a day of exploring villages or lavender fields. And of course, don’t skip dessert – tarts, fruit galettes, and lavender-infused treats are everywhere! Yum!

Week in Provence Road Trip Itinerary 

But first, a few notes about this Provence itinerary:

  • This Provence itinerary assumes you have a full 7 days in the region. Meaning if your flight arrives mid-day or late at night, you’ll want an extra day in order to see and do all the things on this itinerary.
  • You’ll want to check market days before visiting. Don’t assume the markets will be open every day of the week, even in high season. I wouldn’t necessarily switch your flight for the markets, but it’s fun to experience one or two!
  • We rented a car, so this Provence itinerary assumes you do the same. Visiting the highlights is possible without one, but you definitely will have a harder time finding transport to the smaller villages.
  • Start your days early if you want to beat crowds at popular villages, lavender fields, and viewpoints. It’s a truly stunning region, and its popularity shows!

Provence Itinerary At-A-Glance 

  • Day 1: Lavender fields and Moustiers-Sainte-Marie
  • Day 2: Verdon Gorge and Nearby
  • Day 3: l’isle Sur La Sorgue and Fontaine de Vaucluse
  • Day 4: Rousillon and Gordes 
  • Day 5: Aix-en-Provence and Marsailles
  • Day 6: Cassis 
  • Day 7: Cassis  

Day 1: Lavender Fields and Moustiers-Sainte-Marie

Morning: Lavender fields near Valensole at sunrise!

No summer in Provence feels complete without lavender – it’s the very essence of a Provençal summer after all! And where better to see it than the Plateau de Valensole, home to the most iconic lavender fields in all of France (and maybe even the world)!

Yes, I’m telling you to wake up early on the first day of this Provence road trip – but trust me, sunrise is worth it. At golden hour, the fields glow in soft light, the crowds are minimal, and your photos turn out so much better without those harsh midday shadows. Even if you’re not here in peak season (late June to mid-July), the drive itself is beautiful, with rolling hills of olive groves and sunflowers.

I loved the fields so much I dragged my husband back for sunset, too (he wasn’t thrilled, haha). Sunset is more crowded than sunrise, but the colors are just as magical.

Photography + Practical Tips
If you want those classic Provençal shots, bring a white dress and straw hat (like I did!). Just be mindful of the fields: walk between the rows (definitely not on them) since lavender is delicate. And don’t be surprised by the bees – they’re everywhere, but as long as you leave them alone, they’ll (most likely) leave you alone too.

Quick note: Lavender is usually harvested by early August, but timing depends on the heat. Check recent posts on Instagram or Google Map reviews before you head out so you don’t wake up at dawn for an empty field.

Must-See Lavender Spots on the Plateau de Valensole

  • Tiny Stone House in the Valley: Probably the most photogenic spot on the plateau. It sits tucked into a dip in the field, so you’ll barely see it from the road (Google Maps coordinates: 43.893751, 6.116192). You’ll need to walk in a bit to get the view – but once you spot it, it’s magic.
  • Lavandes Angelevin: A picture-perfect combo of lavender and sunflowers, just 15 minutes from the stone house. We skipped this one since we already have sunflower fields back home in California, but if you don’t – go!
  • Other Fields Along Route de la Lavande: Honestly, the whole plateau is covered in fields. Drive around, pull off when you see a pretty spot, and just wander. Some people even rent bikes to explore more slowly.

We visited the tiny town of Valensole afterwards, and to be quite honest, didn’t find much there. I’m not sure if we visited during an off time (or if it was just too early before the town woke up), but I wouldn’t mind skipping it next time. Especially since there’s so many other charming villages nearby!

Afternoon: Explore Moustiers-Sainte-Marie

Once you’re done smelling the lavender (and taking a million pictures), it’s time to explore the charming village of Moustiers-Sainte-Marie!

Moustiers is one of those villages that looks like it was designed for postcards – pastel shutters, cobblestone lanes, and dramatic cliffs rising up behind it. Plan to spend about 4 – 5 hours here, which is enough time to wander, shop, and relax without rushing.

Here’s what to include on your visit:

  • Ceramic shops: Moustiers is famous for its faïence pottery, a tradition dating back to the Middle Ages. Even if you don’t plan to buy anything, it’s fun to pop into the little ateliers and browse.
  • The star of Moustiers: Look up and you’ll see the golden star hanging between two cliffs above the town. Legend says it was placed there by a knight returning from the Crusades, and it’s become the town’s symbol.
  • Notre-Dame de Beauvoir Chapel: If you’re up for a climb (about 262 stone steps), head up to this small chapel above the town. The view over Moustiers and the valley is incredible.
  • Waterfall views: A stream runs through the center of town, cascading down into little waterfalls. It makes the whole village feel extra fairytale-like.
  • Lunch or coffee in the square: Take a break in one of the cafés in Place de l’Église, perfect for people-watching and soaking up the atmosphere.
  • Église Notre-Dame de l’Assomption: Right in the heart of town, this Romanesque church is worth stepping inside for a quick look.

If you have a bit of extra time, you could also browse the weekly market (if your visit falls on a Friday morning/early afternoon by chance). 

Where to Stay: Moustiers-Sainte-Marie 

Day 2: Verdon Gorge and Beyond

Morning: Paddling on Verdon Gorge

No trip to Provence is complete without seeing the Verdon Gorge, often called the Grand Canyon of France. The turquoise water is absolutely unreal in person (don’t just trust me, see it for yourself!). And it’s only 15 minutes from Moustiers, meaning you can’t not go! 

Ever since that first photo I saw of the gorge on social media, I knew I needed to add it to our Provence road trip. And WHOA – I’m so glad we did! We had such a fun morning paddling around and taking in the views.

I have an entire blog post dedicated to our time paddling around Verdon Gorge (go check that out!), but here’s a few quick notes:

  • Rent a kayak or paddle boat right at the bridge at Pont du Galetas (the most popular access point). Rentals usually cost about €20 – €25 for an hour and go up if you want longer. Kayaks, canoes, and pedal boats are all available.
  • In July and August, lines can get long, so aim to arrive by 9:30 – 10am if you want to avoid waiting.
  • Expect to paddle about 2 km into the gorge – the cliffs rise dramatically above you, and it’s pure magic.
  • There’s no facilities once you’re in the gorge, so bring snacks, drinks, sunscreen, and water shoes if you’ve got them. The rocky edges aren’t fun barefoot. We stocked up on drinks and snacks in town the day before (there’s not tons at Verdon Gorge, although a few options for drinks and ice cream which we happily bought afterwards).
  • Swimming is allowed, but the water is chilly even in summer – refreshing after paddling!

And yes, wear that bright swimsuit – it pops against the blue water in photos. 

Late Morning: Scenic Drive

If you’ve still got energy, take the Route des Crêtes (Ridge Road). The 23 km loop is packed with jaw-dropping viewpoints. Some of the most famous stops include Belvédère de la Carelle and Balcon de la Mescla. Allow 1.5–2 hours with photo stops. 

We decided to skip this because we were already pretty knocked out after all that time in the sun at the gorge and my husband didn’t wanna add extra time to our already pretty long drive to L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue (our next base).

Afternoon: Stop at L’Occitane en Provence

You’re in Provence! Meaning you’ve gotta stop at L’Occitane en Provence! On your way out of the gorge area, make a quick stop at the L’Occitane factory in Manosque (about an hour’s drive). 

You can book a tour in advance (around €6 per person) or just shop at the boutique. It’s one of those places that are right on the way so might as well go check it out! We picked up a few hand creams and they all smelled so good!

Afternoon: Optional Detours

  • Apt: This town is famous for its candied fruit (fruits confits) and local markets. If you’re there on a Saturday morning, the market is a must-see, offering cheeses, olives, lavender products, and regional specialties. It’s also a good lunch/snack stop before heading to L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue.
  • Saignon: A picturesque hilltop village with cobblestone streets, small cafés, and panoramic views over the Luberon valley. It’s a perfect 30 – 45 minute stop to stretch your legs and take photos.

Evening: Drive to L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue

From the gorge, it’s about a 2.5-hour drive to L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue (or less from Apt or Saignon), where you’ll base yourself next. 

Where to Stay: L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue or nearby town

Day 3: l’isle Sur La Sorgue and nearby towns

Morning: Explore L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue 

Start your morning wandering through L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue, a riverside town with canals, waterwheels, and a laid-back Provençal vibe. It’s often called the antiques capital of Provence, and you’ll see why – antique shops and art galleries line the streets.

If you’re lucky enough to be here on a Sunday, don’t miss the famous market (7am – 2pm). It’s one of the largest in Provence (it’s huge!), with antiques, Provençal linens, soaps, fresh produce, cheeses, olives, and tons more spilling throughout the town. We didn’t buy much (no space in our small suitcases since we were traveling for 3 weeks in a carry-on), but it was still super fun to look at everything and even more fun to people-watch! 

PS – if you’re visiting L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue for the market and not staying overnight like we were, it will be extremely difficult to find a parking spot. Plan to arrive by 9am (the latest!) and pray you get a spot!

If you’re not here on a Sunday, there’s a smaller version on Thursdays that still brings plenty of charm. And if tomorrow happens to be Sunday for you, you can easily switch around Day 3 and Day 4! Or even swing by the market on Day 5 before heading to Aix-en-Provence if that’s when Sunday is.

We had lunch at Restaurant Le Vivier, just outside the center. It’s a Michelin-recognized spot right on the river – perfect if you’re looking for a special meal (you’re in Provence – that’s reason enough for something special!). It was recommended to us by friends (they raved about it), and it was worth the short drive outta town. Otherwise, there are plenty of cafés and bistros in town.

Afternoon: Driving Loop Through the Luberon Villages

After lunch, hit the road for a mini loop through some of the most charming villages in the Luberon. Provence is perfect for scenic drives and aimless wandering through its villages, so that’s exactly what I recommend doing next! Here’s a few recommendations!

  • Fontaine-de-Vaucluse (15 min from L’Isle): Home to the emerald-green Sorgue River, which gushes straight out of the rocks. The walk to the spring is short and scenic, though this spot can feel touristy, so plan for just a quick stop.
  • Ménerbes (20 min from Fontaine): A quiet, picture-perfect hilltop village surrounded by vineyards and olive groves. Picasso once lived here (yes, THE Picasso), and it’s a lovely place for a stroll with fewer crowds.
  • Bonnieux (15 min from Ménerbes): A gorgeous medieval village with some of the best valley views in Provence. Climb up to the old church for a sweeping panorama, or simply wander the cobblestone streets with a gelato or coffee in hand.
  • Lourmarin (optional, 30 min from Bonnieux): If time allows, continue to Lourmarin, one of the most stylish villages in the region. Known for its Renaissance château, boutique shops, and lively Friday market, it’s a fun spot to end the afternoon.

Psst: If you’d rather visit Avignon instead, this is the perfect day to do so since it’s only about a 35 minute drive west from L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue. BUT I heard Avignon is pretty city-like and we wanted more of a village storybook feel, so we skipped it! Saint-Rémy-de-Provence also isn’t far from L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue, but we couldn’t fit everything in and had to pick and choose, so again, skipped it! Saint-Remy is further from the other villages, so we prioritized the ones in the Luberon Valley.

From here, drive back toward L’Isle-sur-la-Sorgue for the evening (1 hour from Lourmarin, or 35 min if heading straight back from Bonnieux).

Where to Stay: L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue or nearby town

Day 4:  Rousillon and Gordes 

Time to visit two of the most popular villages in all of Provence – Roussillon and Gordes! Roussillon is famous for its ochre cliffs (you can walk the Ochre Trail for insane colors), while Gordes is your classic hilltop village with sweeping valley views. I highly recommend visiting both as they’ve got extremely different feels.

Morning: Roussillon

Kick off your day in Roussillon, a village that looks like it’s been painted in every shade of red, orange, and gold. I swear, every single building in town is one of these few colors! It sits in the heart of Provence’s Luberon Regional Park and is famous for the ochre deposits that were once mined here. Nearly every building in town is plastered with ochre pigments, giving the streets a warm glow that changes with the light. Safe to say I absolutely loved photographing it!

Start by strolling through the narrow lanes lined with cafés, art galleries, and little shops selling local ceramics and ochre pigments you can take home (Atelier Marchand de couleurs was one of my favorites). The whole place feels like a natural art palette.

One of the best things to do here is walk the Ochre Trail (Sentier des Ocres), a short, easy hike (choose between a 30 or 60 minute loop) that winds through the ochre cliffs and abandoned quarries. The rock formations come in surreal shapes and fiery colors that contrast beautifully with the green pines above. Even if you’re not a “hiker,” it’s well worth it – just don’t wear your best shoes, because the dust will cling and white shoes will turn red (kinda like what happened to me in Uluru, Australia!).

For a little local flavor, you can also pop into the Conservatoire des Ocres et de la Couleur (Ochre Conservatory), set in a former ochre factory. It gives a deeper look into how ochre was used historically in paint, textiles, and art.

A few additional tips:

  • What to wear: If you wanna coordinate your outfit to your surroundings, white or light green outfits look amazing against the orange backdrop for photos. I recommend wearing earth tones as bold pops don’t really match!
  • Timing: Plan for 2 – 3 hours here – enough time for a relaxed wander, the Ochre Trail, and maybe a coffee or pastry in the village square.
  • Parking info: There are two main paid parking lots at the edge of the village (follow the “Parking” signs as you approach). They’re just a short 5 – 10 minute walk uphill into the center, and it’s best to arrive early in the morning to snag a spot before all the other day-trippers roll in.

Afternoon: Gordes

Once you’ve soaked up all the golden tones in Roussillon, it’s just a 15-minute drive to Gordes, one of Provence’s most iconic hilltop villages. Here, take your time strolling the cobblestone streets, popping into boutiques, and soaking in the sweeping views of the Luberon valley below. I especially loved seeing the stone houses stacked into the hillside – it’s such a unique sight you don’t come across every day!

As you explore the tiny lanes, you’ll find shops selling Provençal linens, lavender products, and olive oil, along with art galleries tucked behind heavy wooden doors. We ended up relaxing with drinks at Airelles Gordes once we got sick of the summer sun, and honestly, I could’ve sat there all afternoon just taking in those incredible views.

I noticed that Gordes has a much more polished, upscale, and chic vibe compared to some of the other hilltop villages in Provence. It’s beautifully maintained, with golden-stone buildings, neatly cobbled streets, and elegant boutiques and cafés. While it still has that classic Provençal charm, it feels a bit more refined, whereas villages like Roussillon or Moustiers-Sainte-Marie feel more quaint, rustic, and lived-in. It definitely pays to visit them all to see the differences (kinda like on our Puglia road trip – another great region to road trip in Europe)!

Honestly, Gordes is more about aimlessly strolling, sipping rosé, and taking in the sweeping valley views than actual things to check off. But here’s a few if you’d like to structure out your afternoon a bit.

  • Gordes Viewpoint: This is the classic photo spot you’ve seen in all the IG posts and postcards. Stop here for a panoramic shot of the town clinging to the cliffs. We stopped here on our way out since the lighting was nicer later in the afternoon. Put in “Town View Point Gordes” on Google Maps and you’ll find it right away. Note that there’s a small parking spot a bit further down the road, but it does get busy. Thankfully most people only stay a few minutes, so you can usually grab a spot without waiting too long.
  • Lunch in Gordes: If you’re looking for a splurge-worthy meal, I HIGHLY recommend Hotel Les Bories & Spa. It’s set in a peaceful location with a poolside restaurant and Michelin-star dining. Perfect for a leisurely Provençal lunch before continuing your sightseeing. We LOVED this spot, and after seeing the hotel grounds a bit, we kinda wish we had splurged and stayed here for a night!
  • Saint Firmin Palace and Cellars: Step inside this Renaissance palace to explore its underground rooms and wine cellars carved right into the rock.
  • Village des Bories (just outside town): An open-air museum showcasing traditional dry-stone huts that once served as shelters and farm buildings.
  • Abbaye Notre-Dame de Sénanque: A working abbey surrounded by lavender fields (best viewed late June to mid-July). It’s one of the most photographed lavender spots in Provence (for good reason). When we visited midday it was especially crowded and parking was practically nonexistent so we only saw it from afar.

Where to Stay: L’Isle -sur-la-Sorgue or nearby town

Day 5: Aix-en-Provence and Marseilles

Morning: Aix-en-Provence

This was probably one of our favorite stops on our entire Provence road trip! I think we were starting to crave larger towns after a few days in such remote tiny villages, so we really enjoyed the lively energy. AND the entire city is downright gorgeous. There’s tons of elegant squares, more fountains than you could ever imagine, pastel-colored facades, and leafy streets. 

Aix is a vibrant, elegant university town with a mix of history, culture, and modern life. It has a more urban, polished feel than the smaller hilltop villages, but it still keeps that Provençal charm. The city feels lively, with cafés spilling onto squares, street performers, and students giving it an energetic buzz.

While I could honestly stroll the small city all day, here’s a few highlights not to miss:

  • Stroll Cours Mirabeau: The wide, tree-lined boulevard is the heart of Aix, perfect for a morning coffee or breakfast outdoors. Enjoy the fountains, lively cafés, and people-watching.
  • Explore Vieil Aix (Old Town): Wander the narrow streets, charming squares, artisan shops, and pastel-colored façades. Aimless wandering here is a must!
  • Visit the Markets: Aix has fantastic markets for fresh produce, flowers, olive oil, cheeses, and local specialties. The biggest is on Saturdays, but smaller ones happen Tuesday and Thursday.
  • See the Fountains: Aix is known as the “City of a Thousand Fountains.” Don’t miss the decorative ones like Fontaine de la Rotonde and others sprinkled through the streets.
  • Paul Cézanne’s Studio & Nearby Landscapes: Visit the studio of the famous painter and stroll through spots that inspired his work. Great for art and history lovers.
  • Grab a Light Lunch or Pastry: Stop at a café in one of the picturesque squares to soak up the lively, elegant Aix vibe before heading to your next destination.

Afternoon: Marseille 

It’s time to head to the coast! Marseille is a bustling, gritty, and culturally rich port city with a very different feel from the quaint villages of Provence. It’s energetic and diverse, blending modern urban life with historic charm. The city has a vibrant arts scene, colorful neighborhoods, and a strong Mediterranean identity. It feels rawer and more lived-in than polished towns like Gordes or Aix, which is part of its appeal.

Here’s how you can spend the rest of your day:

  • Old Port (Vieux-Port): Start your afternoon strolling along the harbor. Watch the fishermen sell their catch, admire the boats, and maybe grab a coffee or rosé at one of the waterfront cafés. We got ice cream and sat on a bench overlooking the port – my favorite thing to do!
  • Le Panier: Wander through Marseille’s oldest neighborhood just a short walk from the port. There’s lots of little artisan shops to explore (with plenty of places to buy the famous decorative soaps), street art, and charming squares.
  • Basilique Notre-Dame de la Garde: Take a taxi, bus, or drive up to this iconic hilltop church for panoramic views of the city and coastline. It’s a must-see landmark and perfect for photos. We passed by on our drive but were itching to get to the coast so we just admired it from the car window.

End the day by driving to Cassis (only about 45 minutes away) – the last official stop on this Provence road trip itinerary!

Where to Stay: Cassis

Days 6-7: Cassis 

If you’ve got a full week in Provence, head to the coast for a change of scenery – specifically, the postcard-perfect town of Cassis. Tucked between dramatic limestone cliffs and the sparkling Mediterranean, Cassis is like a low-key, charming cousin to the glitzy Riviera hotspots like Nice or Cannes.

The waterfront is lined with colorful old buildings, fishing boats, and casual spots to grab a drink or bite to eat. It’s the kind of place where you can just wander, sit by the water, and not feel like you have to do much of anything.

Cassis is often compared to St. Tropez, but it’s much more low-key – no big scene, just good food, great views, and a slower rhythm. It’s also the jumping-off point for visiting the Calanques, which you definitely need to do while here!

Even though there’s not TONS to do in this charming seaside town (no FOMO allowed!), here’s a few recommendations for your 2 days in Cassis. Whatever you do, don’t miss the Calanques!

Port de Cassis

The harbor in Cassis (Port de Cassis) is the heart of the town and the perfect spot to hang out. We grabbed a table by the water and ended up people (and boat) watching for way longer than planned. With pastel houses lining the waterfront and fishing boats bobbing in front, it’s ridiculously photogenic and full of buzzing restaurants.

Some of the restaurants are crazy overpriced though, so definitely scope out the menu before you sit down. For food, I’d go with Chez Gilbert if you want a proper bouillabaisse or Le Grand Large for fresh oysters and grilled fish. A lot of places do prix-fixe menus at lunch that are way more affordable than dinner, which is perfect if you want to splurge on seafood (and maybe a glass of crisp white wine) without blowing your whole budget. We loved sharing a meat and cheese board a bit before sunset!

The port gets busy, but that’s part of the vibe – colorful buildings, packed terraces, everyone lingering over long meals. And if you’re planning to see the Calanques, the boat tours leave right from here, so it’s super convenient. We found ourselves at the port multiple times a day!

Swim or sunbathe at Plage de la Grande Mer

Welcome to the Mediterranean! Time to take a tip! Plage de la Grande Mer, the main beach in Cassis, is just a quick stroll from the harbor so it’s super easy to get to. It’s family-friendly, with calm water and gorgeous views of the cliffs. Just know it’s pebbly (not sandy), so water shoes really come in handy.

The beach can get absolutely packed by midday in summer, so if you want a quieter vibe, head down in the morning or swing by closer to sunset. Shade is basically nonexistent, so bring an umbrella or plan to rent a sunbed early. There are a few kiosks and cafés nearby for snacks, but plenty of people pack a picnic and make an afternoon of it.

If you’re after clearer water and a slightly less chaotic scene, walk over to Plage du Bestouan. This smaller cove is rockier, but it’s perfect for swimming and snorkeling – and you’ll spot more locals than tourists. But don’t be fooled – it’s still wildly crowded. 

Parking near the beaches can be a real headache in peak season, so if you’re driving, aim for early morning. The lots closest to Plage de la Grande Mer fill up fast, but there’s overflow parking up the hill with a free shuttle that’ll drop you right by the beach.

Explore the colorful town center

Cassis is compact and super walkable, so there’s no rush – just take your time wandering the narrow streets. I loved stumbling across boutique shops selling everything from handmade ceramics to chic summer dresses, and little art galleries tucked behind heavy wooden doors. And yes, there’s even a Havaianas shop if you desperately need some new flip flops. Grab a Tarte Tropézienne from La Tarte Tropézienne Pâtisserie Viennoiserie Sandwicherie Pain, a speciality of the region.

Don’t miss the local market on Wednesdays and Fridays. It’s full of fresh produce, fragrant herbs, artisanal soaps, and colorful Provençal textiles. Too bad I was traveling carry-on only!

Take a boat tour to the Calanques

By far the #1 thing to do in Cassis – the famous turquoise Calanques! And the easiest and most relaxing way to see the famous Calanques is by boat, which is what we did – my husband isn’t exactly a hiker (fair enough, it’s his vacation too). Tours leave regularly from the Cassis harbor and range from 45 minutes to 2 hours. Even the shorter ones offer incredible views of the limestone cliffs and turquoise inlets, including Calanque de Port-Miou, Port-Pin, and the dramatic En-Vau. 

Make sure to book in advance during high season or show up early in the day for the best time slots. Bring a hat and water – there’s no shade on deck, but the views are totally worth it.

If you wanna get a little more active but stay on the water, sign up for a sea kayaking trip in the Calanques! This is the exact tour I wish we had done – it looks absolutely incredible! Next time for me!

Hike the Calanques for unforgettable views

If you’re up for some adventure, hiking into the Calanques is an incredible way to experience the landscape up close. The most popular (and most photographed) hike is to Calanque d’En-Vau, which rewards you with jaw-dropping views and a stunning beach at the end. The most common route is from the Port-Miou parking area, passing through Calanque de Port-Pin and continuing to En-Vau. 

You can either hike yourself or join a guided tour with a local (who will undoubtedly know all the best scenic spots) – that’s what I’d do if I was traveling solo (like when I hiked the Seven Hanging Valleys Trail in Portugal)!

  • Distance: ~6 km round-trip (3.7 miles)
  • Time: 2.5 – 3.5 hours depending on pace and stops
  • Difficulty: Moderate to challenging – rocky terrain, some steep sections, and little shade.

Come prepared! Wear proper shoes, bring plenty of water, and go early in the day to beat the heat and crowds. The reward? One of the most beautiful spots on the Mediterranean. Scenic hiking at its best!

Drive the Route des Crêtes and stop at Cap Canaille

This cliffside road between Cassis and La Ciotat is one of the most scenic drives in all of France, with stunningly jaw-dropping views of the Mediterranean. Cap Canaille, Europe’s highest sea cliff, is the star stop along the route, and there are several marked viewpoints (belvédères) where you can pull over for photos or just take it all in. 

I love a good viewpoint, and this one definitely lived up to my standards.

Drive it in the late afternoon for golden light, and aim to be at Cap Canaille for sunset – it’s unforgettable! Just be cautious: the road is narrow and winding, with no lights, so avoid driving it after dark.

Wine Tasting

If you have extra time (and didn’t drink enough wine earlier on your Provence road trip, wink wink), visit a nearby vineyard like Clos Sainte Magdeleine, located above the sea (meaning amazing views). Cassis is one of the oldest AOCs in France and is especially known for its crisp white wines. Tastings are usually by appointment, so call ahead or check online.

Where to Stay: Cassis

So there ya have it – my highly recommended one week in Provence road trip! Are you headed to France anytime soon?!



The post One Week in Provence Itinerary: The Perfect Provence Road Trip appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/one-week-in-provence-itinerary/feed/ 0
The Perfect Guadalajara Itinerary: 4 Days in Guadalajara https://apassionandapassport.com/guadalajara-itinerary-4-days/ https://apassionandapassport.com/guadalajara-itinerary-4-days/#respond Tue, 03 Jun 2025 08:20:54 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32506 Headed to Mexico and planning a Guadalajara itinerary? This vibrant Mexican city is packed with culture, history, hip neighborhoods, and some of the best birria you’ll ever eat. I’m sharing my exact 4 days in Guadalajara below! ​​Often called the cultural heart of Mexico, Guadalajara is the birthplace of mariachi, tequila, and charrería (Mexican rodeo).Continue Reading

The post The Perfect Guadalajara Itinerary: 4 Days in Guadalajara appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to Mexico and planning a Guadalajara itinerary? This vibrant Mexican city is packed with culture, history, hip neighborhoods, and some of the best birria you’ll ever eat. I’m sharing my exact 4 days in Guadalajara below!

​​Often called the cultural heart of Mexico, Guadalajara is the birthplace of mariachi, tequila, and charrería (Mexican rodeo). It’s deeply traditional yet buzzing with creative energy – think leafy streets, colorful murals, stylish cafés, and trendy boutiques. All right up my alley!

Honestly, Guadalajara wasn’t even on my radar or high on my bucket list. I was just browsing for quick, direct flights from San Francisco and it popped up. I kinda booked it on a whim – and I’m so glad I did. Because over my four days in Guadalajara, I basically ate my way through the city: birria, tacos, churros… at times it felt like I was on a nonstop food tour, haha. My favorite kind of trip!

In this post, I’ll help you plan the perfect Guadalajara itinerary – plus where to eat, stay, and explore. Spoiler alert: you’re gonna fall in love with this place.

Before visiting, I had no idea what to expect. Even though I’d been to coastal favorites like Puerto Vallarta and Sayulita, I’d never ventured inland to Guadalajara itself. 

But Guadalajara won me over with its leafy plazas, bustling markets, and effortlessly cool neighborhoods like Tlaquepaque and Colonia Americana (hello, cocktail bars and concept stores!). It reminded me of a smaller, more laid-back Mexico City – a city I absolutely adore and love re-visiting every few years.

As the capital of Jalisco and Mexico’s second-largest city, Guadalajara somehow manages to stay charming, artsy, and very walkable. 

So let’s get to it! Lots of birria, plazas, murals, and mariachi coming right up. Just make sure to pack your appetite – and maybe some stretchy pants – for all these amazing things to do in Guadalajara.

4 Days in Guadalajara Itinerary Logistics

Where is Guadalajara and How to Get There

Guadalajara’s in western Mexico, right in the middle of the state of Jalisco (aka the birthplace of tequila, mariachi, and so many good tacos). Sitting at around 1,700 meters (5,600 feet) above sea level, it’s up on a high plateau, which means the weather stays pretty mild and comfy year-round. No crazy heatwaves or humidity here!

It’s about 350 miles (560 kilometers) northwest of Mexico City, tucked inland on what’s called the Western Mexican Plateau. That might sound a little technical, but it basically means you’ve got mountains, valleys, and lots of gorgeous nature surrounding the city. And all that natural beauty definitely adds to the charm.

Because of where it’s located, Guadalajara makes a great base for exploring western Mexico. It’s way less touristy than the beach spots, but still full of culture, history, and amazing food. And if you do want some beach time, Puerto Vallarta and Sayulita are just a 2-3 hour drive away. So you kinda get the best of both worlds!

Flying Internationally

Thankfully, flying to Guadalajara is super straightforward. The Miguel Hidalgo y Costilla International Airport (GDL) is just about 30 – 40 minutes from the city center and has direct flights from tons of major U.S. and Canadian cities. 

I flew in from San Francisco and couldn’t believe the flight was under 4 hours. It was a really pretty flight since we flew along the coastline the entire time. You’ll also find good connections from Los Angeles, Dallas, Houston, Denver, Chicago, and Vancouver, among others. Once you land, you can grab an Uber (what I did!) or a pre-booked taxi to your hotel – easy.

Getting from Guadalajara Airport to the City Center

Using a rideshare app is by far the easiest and most cost-effective option, and how I got from the airport to my hotel in the city. Uber and Didi both operate at the airport, and rides into central Guadalajara (25-40 minutes depending on traffic) usually cost around 200-350 MXN (about $10–$20 USD). You’ll need to walk to the designated pickup zone just outside the arrivals area (past Pizza Hut), so keep an eye out for signs or ask an airport staff member.

Psst – At first I thought my initial Uber driver was trying to scam me by having me meet technically outside the airport, but once the next one told me this, I realized it was typical. Whoops!

Coming from Elsewhere in Mexico

If you’re already in Mexico (you lucky duck!), you’ll be pleased to know that Guadalajara is really well connected to other parts of the country by both bus and domestic flights. It’s just a 2-3 hour drive (or a super quick flight) from places like Puerto Vallarta or Sayulita, which makes it a popular add-on if you’re looking to mix beachy vibes with city exploring. 

Tons of travelers do a combo trip – start on the coast with tacos and surf, then head inland for tequila tastings, art galleries, and historic charm. If I had another few days I would have gladly gone to Sayulita (and San Pancho – my favorite) for a bit.

There’s also reliable long-distance buses (like Primera Plus or ETN) from other major cities like Mexico City, León, San Miguel de Allende, and Guanajuato. If you’re not in a rush and want to save money, this is a great way to go. And trust me, these buses are comfy (I’ve taken them plenty, haha).

How to Get Around Guadalajara

Getting around Guadalajara is actually super easy, even if your Spanish is a little rusty (no shame – I’m right there with you!). The city has a mix of modern transportation and walkable neighborhoods so no need to rent a car unless you really, really want to. 

Uber is your best friend here. It’s reliable, affordable, and way easier than trying to flag a taxi or figure out the bus routes. I used Uber to get just about everywhere – short rides within the city often cost less than $3 USD (!!!). You can also use DiDi, another popular rideshare app in Mexico, though I personally stuck with Uber and had zero issues.

If you’re staying in neighborhoods like Centro Histórico or Americana, you can walk to a lot of the major sights, especially if you’re a city walker like me. The tree-lined streets and colorful buildings make strolling around part of the experience.

There’s also a light rail system (SITEUR) that connects some key parts of the city and suburbs. It’s clean, efficient, and costs just a few pesos, but I honestly didn’t use it at all since Uber was so convenient (and cheap). Buses are available too, but they can be confusing and inconsistent if you’re not familiar with the routes.

If you’re planning day trips to places like Lake Chapala or Tequila, tours with transportation included are the way to go – you won’t have to deal with logistics or designated drivers (especially important if you’re sampling tequila, obviously). More on that soon!

When to Plan Your Guadalajara Itinerary 

The best time to plan your Guadalajara itinerary really depends on what kind of vibe you’re going for – but good news: Guadalajara is a year-round destination with pretty mild weather.

Winter (November to February)

This is widely regarded as the best time to visit Guadalajara, and when I visited! The weather is pleasantly warm during the day, with temperatures hovering in the low 70s to mid-80s°F (21-30°C), and cooler, crisp evenings – perfect for strolling through the historic center or dining on an outdoor terrace. Rain is minimal, and the city is lush and vibrant after the summer rains. 

For reference, I visited in mid-February, and had mostly sunny days, clear skies, and comfortable temperatures. I didn’t realize when I booked my trip that I’d be there for Guadalajara’s birthday (the city was officially founded on February 14, 1542), so got especially lucky with a bunch of fun events and lots of dancing/performances (including some epic fireworks in the town square).

Thankfully, besides the GDLuz Sound and Light Festival at night, the crowds were manageable and I never felt like I was fighting for space at popular attractions. However this is peak tourism season though so make sure to book your accommodations early.

Spring (March to May)

Spring is a wonderful time for those who enjoy a bit more warmth, as temperatures climb into the mid-80s and 90s°F (28-35°C), especially in May. The sunny days and blooming jacaranda trees (those stunning purple blooms) provide a beautiful backdrop for sightseeing. And there’s less tourists here than during fall and winter!

Summer (June to September): Rainy Season

While summer in Guadalajara brings lush greenery, it also means the rainy season is in full swing. Expect afternoon or evening showers, often heavy but short-lived (like what happened to my friends and I when we went to Mexico City in August). 

Temperatures hover between the high 80s and low 90s°F (30-34°C), with high humidity levels. It’s not unbearable, but you’ll need to pack for both rain and heat. The upside to visiting in summer is that the city is less crowded, hotel prices are lower, and everything looks wonderfully green. 

Autumn (September and October)

Autumn sees the last of the rainy season, but the rains start to taper off in September, and by October, there’s clearer skies. Temperatures cool slightly compared to summer, with days in the mid-80s°F (29°C) and nights in the low 60s°F (16-18°C). It’s still a great time to visit with fewer crowds, but always check the forecast as some years, September can still bring heavy rains.

Are 4 days in Guadalajara Enough?

I certainly think so! On a 4-day Guadalajara itinerary you can explore the historic city center, eat your weight in birria and tortas ahogadas, and wander through colorful neighborhoods like Tlaquepaque. And even have time for day trips to Tequila (a must do!), Lake Chapala, and the artisan town of Ajijic. 

I found 4 days in Guadalajara to be the perfect amount of time, and didn’t feel rushed at all. Just note if you wanna watch Lucha Libre (only on Tuesday nights) and/or catch the Jalisco horse races (races take place on Sundays), you’ll need to coordinate your itinerary to fall on those days.

Sure, you can definitely stay longer (it’s Mexico’s second largest city after all), but if I had a few more days, I’d likely go to the beach.

Health and Safety in Guadalajara

Guadalajara is generally safe for travelers, especially in popular neighborhoods like Centro Histórico, Tlaquepaque, and Chapultepec. Like any big city, though, it’s smart to stay alert – always keep an eye on your belongings, especially in crowded areas, and avoid walking alone late at night. I personally felt very comfortable here and had no issues, but I always took basic precautions (like using Uber at night and not flashing valuables).

Can You Drink the Water in Guadalajara?

Technically, tap water in Guadalajara is treated, but locals and visitors both avoid drinking it. Stick to bottled or filtered water just to be safe – most hotels, Airbnbs, and cafes offer filtered water stations. Also avoid ice from street vendors unless you’re sure it was made from purified water.

Street Food in Guadalajara

Street food is a huge part of the culture here, and honestly, skipping it would be a crime. I ate plenty of tacos, elotes, and tejuino from carts and roadside stands and had no problems. That said, go where locals go, look for vendors with a crowd (it usually means high turnover and fresher food), and trust your gut – literally. If something looks like it’s been sitting out too long in the sun, maybe skip that one.

Other Guadalajara Itinerary FAQs

Language

Spanish is the official language in Guadalajara, and while you’ll definitely find some English speakers (especially at hotels, tourist attractions, and higher-end restaurants), don’t expect fluent English everywhere. 

I was actually surprised how little English was spoken here – not like in Mexico City where you’ll hear English practically everywhere you go for the most part. Most street vendors, taxi drivers, and small shop owners speak little to no English. 

Therefore, I definitely recommend brushing up on your Spanish before going, or at least knowing a bunch of basic phrases. Google Translate is your best friend (just be sure to download the language in advance if you won’t have service every minute of your trip).

Currency

Guadalajara, like the rest of Mexico, uses the Mexican Peso (MXN). And lucky for us in the US, the conversion rate is usually quite favorable for travelers. 

Don’t expect all restaurants and shops in Guadalajara to take credit cards (although most mid-range and upscale restaurants do), so always be prepared with some cash. In addition, you’ll want some cash for tips (see below), at small handicraft shops, and road-side taco stands, as well as for any taxis you may be taking. 

I highly advise you to take out some pesos at an ATM at the airport upon landing (as you’ll get the best conversion rate using an ATM and never at a currency exchange kiosk). I recommend getting a no-fee ATM card if you don’t already have one (we’ve been using Charles Schwab for years and haven’t paid a pesky fee in forever).

At the time of writing (May 2025), the peso is equivalent to 5 cents USD (or 1 USD = ~20 Mexican pesos). I found it easy-ish to convert in my head by thinking of 100 pesos = roughly $5USD (or 200 pesos = ~$10USD). It takes a bit of practice but after a day or two you’ll be able to do the conversion super quickly in your head.

Tipping

Tipping is customary and appreciated in Guadalajara. In restaurants, 10-15% is standard if a service charge isn’t already included. For smaller services (like taxi rides, bag handling, or bathroom attendants), a few pesos or rounding up is perfectly fine. On tours, tipping your guide is a nice gesture if you enjoyed the experience.

Electrical Outlets

Mexico uses the same voltage and outlets as the U.S. (110V, type A/B plugs), so if you’re coming from the U.S. or Canada, you won’t need an adapter. 

Where to Stay in Guadalajara

Guadalajara is a sprawling city, but most travelers stick to a few key neighborhoods that are safe, centrally located, and full of charm (plus tacos, always tacos). Here’s a quick breakdown of the best areas to base yourself:

Centro Histórico (Historic Downtown)

If it’s your first time in Guadalajara and you want to be right in the heart of the action, this is the place to be. You’ll be within walking distance of iconic sites like the Guadalajara Cathedral, Teatro Degollado, and the Rotonda de los Jaliscienses Ilustres. Expect grand colonial buildings, bustling plazas, and local markets galore. Just note: it can get busy and noisy, especially on weekends. Check out Hotel TÖTEM Guadalajara (a stylish boutique hotel) and Hotel Portobelo (modern amenities and a central location)

Colonia Americana/Chapultepec area (My Favorite!)

Trendy, artsy, and effortlessly cool – this is Guadalajara’s hipster heart. Think colorful street art, tree-lined streets, third-wave coffee shops, and tons of stylish boutique stays. It felt super safe and walkable, and it’s where you’ll find some of the best nightlife and brunch spots. 

For reference, I stayed at Hotel Antre Chapultepec, and had a great stay! It’s a newer hotel in a great location, super clean, and pretty posh! And the hotel is within walking distance to oh so many restaurants, including Tomate Taqueria (where I went twice, haha), Cafe San Pedro, and Postreria GDL. Honestly, if I went back, I’d stay here again in a heartbeat. Doesn’t hurt that I got a great deal and my room cost less than $250 total for 4 nights!

Also check out Demetria Hotel (where I would have stayed if I wasn’t traveling solo) and GALA Hotel Boutique (more boutiquey with lots of personalized service).

Other Areas to Stay in

Guadalajara is way larger than most people realize, but hey, it is Mexico’s second largest city! If you’ve never been to Guadalajara I highly recommend staying in Centro Historico or Colonia Americana, but there’s other options too!

  • Tequila: Yes, that Tequila. While most people visit on a day trip, spending a night or two in this colorful Pueblo Mágico is 100% worth it – especially if you’re doing distillery tours and don’t want to rush back. The town is adorable, filled with agave fields, boutique hotels, and (unsurprisingly) more tequila than you can dream of. Check out Hotel Solar de las Ánimas, Tequilera Hacienda La Cofradía (on my bucket list for next time), and Casa Salles Hotel Boutique.
  • Tlaquepaque: A charming artisan town that feels like a mini getaway within the city. It’s a great spot for colorful colonial vibes, traditional mariachi music, and shopping for hand-painted ceramics and leather goods. Stay here if you want something different from the usual city experience. Check out Tlaquepaque Pueblito (super colorful and fun) and Aura Hotel Boutique (basic but very spacious rooms).
  • Zapopan: Technically its own city within the Guadalajara metro area and a little farther out from the main attractions – but it’s home to some of the fanciest shopping centers and the stunning Basilica of Zapopan. A good option if you want a more upscale, suburban feel. Check out avid hotels – Guadalajara Av Vallarta Pte by IHG.
  • Near the Airport: My flight home was at the ungodly hour of 7:25AM (yes, early!), so I decided it’d be best to stay the night beforehand at an airport hotel. I stayed at Hangar Select Aeropuerto Guadalajara, which was super comfy (my room was HUGE), and has a free airport shuttle – just make sure to arrange this at check-in).

What and Where to Eat in Guadalajara

The best part of Guadalajara! If you’re not sure what to do next on your Guadalajara itinerary (or you have a little extra time)… just eat. Seriously. That’s exactly what I did, haha. 

This city is bursting with flavor and EVERYTHING (and I mean EVERYTHING) was absolutely delicious. I had such a hard time deciding where (and what!) to eat because I had so much pinned on my map! 

Should I grab birria on a street corner, sip a fruity cazuela under papel picado, or splurge on a 10-course tasting menu?! All of it, por favor!

The food scene is equal parts traditional and experimental, so you can go from devouring a drenched torta ahogada at a hole-in-the-wall spot (yum) to sampling edible art at one of Latin America’s top restaurants – all in the same day. Let’s just say I ate very, very well during my 4 days in Guadalajara, haha.

Classic Local Favorites

  • Tortas Ahogadas Don José: Messy, spicy, and oh so satisfying. Tortas ahogadas are the local specialty, and this no-frills spot is beloved for a reason. Just note they will NOT give you a fork and knife (even if you ask nicely in Spanish, haha, I tried).
  • Birrieria Las 9 Esquinas: A go-to for traditional Jalisco-style birria (stewed goat or beef). There’s often live mariachi nearby, especially on weekends! I came here twice; I loved it so much.
  • La Chata: A Guadalajara institution serving homestyle Mexican comfort food – great for your first meal in the city.
  • Churros La Bombilla: Old-school churro spot with serious history. Think crispy, golden perfection dusted with cinnamon sugar. The best churros in the city and open very late!
  • Taco Fish La Paz: Best fish tacos in town. Just go. I devoured mine. (Open from 9am – 4:30pm, so plan accordingly!)

Cool, Trendy Eats

  • Piggy Back: This café is known for its chilaquiles – huge portions, bold flavors, and some of the best I had in Mexico. Plus, the whole space is oh so cute and I fell in love with their branding.
  • Tomate Taquería: Open late and a solid bet for after-hours tacos. The al pastor hits especially hard post-tequila. I came twice and loved the meat both times.
  • Karmele: A trendy, plant-forward bakery perfect for a lighter brunch or lunch option with a local twist. I stumbled upon this little cafe and LOVED their karmelito pastries. A must on your Guadalajara itinerary.
  • Postrería GDL: Where dessert gets theatrical! Expect dramatic, multi-layered creations that are as beautiful as they are delicious. They’ve even got a five-course dessert tasting menu (which I would have loved to try if I wasn’t traveling solo).
  • Loba Gastropub: Upscale pub-style dining with craft beer from Cerveza Loba, one of Guadalajara’s top microbreweries.

Elevated Dining + Drinks

  • Restaurante Alcalde: Ranked among the best restaurants in Latin America. Go for the 10-course tasting menu (around $125 USD), or sample à la carte if you’re not feeling quite that hungry.
  • Allium: A creative, locally-driven spot listed in the World’s 50 Best Discovery guide.
  • De la O Cantina: A sleek and stylish cocktail bar with an old-meets-new cantina vibe.
  • El Gallo Altanero: One of the top bars in Mexico (#48 on World’s 50 Best Bars!). Closed Monday and Tuesday, so plan ahead.

The Best 4 Day Guadalajara Itinerary

But first, a few notes about this Guadalajara itinerary:

  • This Guadalajara itinerary assumes you have a full 4 days in Guadalajara. Meaning if you arrive mid-day or late at night, you’ll want an extra day in order to see and do all the things on this itinerary.
  • BUT you can easily shorten this itinerary into 2 or 3 full days by simply removing a day trip or two. You’ll notice that 3 out of the 4 days in Guadalajara are actually mostly day trips, haha.
  • You can totally rearrange the days if you’d like. Meaning, you can easily do Day 3 on Day 1, and vice-versa.
  • This Guadalajara itinerary doesn’t include Lucha Libre (Mexican wrestling that only happens on Tuesday nights) and Charreria (Mexico’s national horse-racing sport with competitions taking place on Sunday). If you’d like to see either of these things, make sure you arrange your itinerary accordingly!

Day 1: Explore Downtown Guadalajara (Centro Histórico)

Morning and Early Afternoon: Centro Historico

I started my Guadalajara itinerary with a walking tour – something I always recommend doing on Day 1 in a new destination! It was a deep dive into the city’s historic heart, and honestly, the perfect intro to the culture, history, and energy of Jalisco’s capital. I didn’t realize how much there is to see in Centro Histórico, from towering cathedrals to leafy plazas and grand government buildings covered in bold murals. 

You can certainly explore it all on your own (nothing’s terribly far), but I highly recommend joining a walking tour like I did. My guide gave tons of helpful context and historical background I would’ve totally missed on my own, plus I felt very safe wandering with a small group. And I didn’t have to navigate at all, which is always appreciated when I travel solo!

We started at the iconic Guadalajara Cathedral, one of the city’s most recognizable landmarks with its signature yellow spires and blend of architectural styles. From there, we strolled through Plaza de Armas, passed the Rotonda de los Jaliscienses Ilustres, and admired the fountains and statues in Plaza de la Liberación.

One of my favorite stops was Palacio Municipal de Guadalajara, which I hadn’t even heard of before the tour. Inside, we found a jaw-dropping mural by José Clemente Orozco that spans the grand staircase – bold, expressive, and so powerful in person. 

We also popped into the Teatro Degollado, a 19th-century neoclassical theater known for its opulent red velvet interiors and perfectly preserved architecture. Even if you don’t catch a performance, it’s worth visiting just to step inside and take it all in.

Next it was market time! Because no visit to Guadalajara is complete without a market or two, and we covered both ends of the spectrum. 

First was Mercado San Juan de Dios, the largest indoor market in Latin America – a total sensory overload in the best way. We wandered through its maze of stalls, sampling local fruits (some I’d never even seen before!), and eyeing all kinds of snacks, souvenirs, leather goods, and more. FYI – you’ll want cash for the market. I even got to try chapulines (fried grasshoppers) and they were better than I’d imagined (kinda tasted like powdery lime crackers to me).  Although I’m not so sure I’d choose to willingly snack on them, haha.

Don’t miss some jericalla flan, a Jalisco speciality that’s basically a cross between flan and creme brulee. And it’s absolutely delicious. You’ll find lots at the market (but always make sure it’s covered for sanitary reasons).

Later on, we swung by Mercado Corona, a smaller, more traditional covered market. It felt more local and relaxed, with everything from fresh plants and handmade cigars to quirky knick-knacks and religious figurines. It’s the kind of place you could poke around for hours and still stumble on something new.

By the end of the tour, I felt like I’d seen so many layers of the city – from its historic core and artistic heart to its everyday hustle. It was a full but satisfying morning/early afternoon, and the perfect way to kick off my time in Guadalajara!

Evening: Wandering Chapultepec & Colonia Americana

After a full day exploring downtown, I headed to the Chapultepec area in Colonia Americana – easily one of the coolest neighborhoods in Guadalajara. The wide, tree-lined boulevard is buzzing with energy, especially in the evening when locals gather at cafés, bars, and taco joints. Plus, I was staying nearby so I definitely wanted to explore my neighborhood.

It reminded me a bit of La Condesa in Mexico City, with its leafy streets, trendy spots on every corner, and that perfect mix of laid-back and lively energy.

One of the first things I stumbled upon was the massive Frida Kahlo mural, known as Magdalena. Painted by Irish artist Fin DAC, this 150-foot-tall piece is an absolute showstopper and a powerful tribute to Frida’s spirit and style. You really can’t miss it – literally and figuratively (it’s HUGE).

Dessert: Okay, confession: I had dessert before dinner – no regrets there. One of the best parts about solo travel is that I get to make all the rules, wink wink.

I popped into Postrería GDL, which is known for its wildly inventive and artful desserts. The menu changes seasonally, so if you’ve seen something online or on Instagram, there’s no guarantee it’ll still be available. Luckily, the waiter walked me through each dessert in detail so I could make an informed (and delicious) decision. 

I ended up going with a super creative citrus-forward dish inspired by the ocean, with bright flavors like yuzu and other tropical notes. It looked like a work of art and tasted just as good. Honestly, I wanted to try everything on the menu – it was that hard to choose.

Al Pastor Dinner: For dinner, I made my way to Tomate Taquería, a beloved local spot serving over-the-top tacos. Just a heads-up: there was a huge line out front when I arrived, so definitely don’t come starving. But the wait was worth every second. 

I ordered both the tacos al pastor and an al pastor volcano (covered in cheese) – and quickly realized it was way too much food so saved the volcano for breakfast the next morning, haha. Plus, my limonada con frutos rojos drink was HUGE!

If you’re looking for a nightcap, here’s a few suggestions in the Chapultepec/Americana area (although I called it a night after my very long day). 

  1. De La O Cantina: Stylish and low-key with craft cocktails focused on Mexican spirits and ingredients. Cozy, creative, and consistently great.
  2. El Gallo Altanero: Ranked on the World’s 50 Best Bars list (#48)! Trendy spot known for its expertly crafted cocktails and rooftop vibes. Closed Mondays and Tuesdays.
  3. Cantina La Occidental: A classic Guadalajara cantina with a lively atmosphere, cheap drinks, and a great place to soak up local flavor (both cultural and alcoholic).
  4. Gallo Altanero Patio: Same folks as El Gallo Altanero, but this one’s more casual and open-air, perfect for a chill drink under the stars.

Day 2: A Boozy Day Trip to Tequila

No Guadalajara itinerary is complete without a day trip to the colorful, agave-scented town of Tequila. It’s only about an hour away from the city, and whether you’re a diehard tequila fan or more of a curious sipper (hi!), this UNESCO-listed pueblo is packed with flavor, charm, and culture.

I joined a guided group tour (there’s a ton of options so shop around!), and I’m so glad I did. Everything was handled for me – transportation, stops, and of course, lots of tequila tastings. If you’re not planning to spend the night in Tequila or figure out logistics yourself, a tour is by far the easiest (and most fun) way to go. Especially if you’re planning to end the day at Cantaritos El Güero (more on that later).

A few other tours to check out: the premium tequila tour and the classic tequila route!

Stop #1: Agave Fields

Our first stop of the day? The iconic blue agave fields, stretching out toward the hills in every direction. We stopped at a local tequila farm, where I got to wander through the spiky rows and take a few (ok, a ton) of fun pics. 

The scenery was unreal – bright green agave set against a deep blue sky, with mountains in the distance. Truly one of those “wow, I’m really here” kind of travel moments. I loved the little farm we stopped at; the entire setup was so charming and photogenic and the swing overlooking the agave fields was so fun! 

Plus, some people hopped on a horse for even more photos, but I decided to skip out since I was wearing a short dress, haha.

Stop #2: Tequila Tour and Tastings

From there, we headed over to Hacienda Casa González for a tequila production tour and demonstration. The space was absolutely stunning – old-school hacienda vibes with traditional equipment, rustic barrels, and agave hearts waiting to be cooked. 

We learned all about the tequila-making process, from roasting the piñas to fermentation and distillation. The guides were super engaging and passionate about their craft, and I walked away with a whole new appreciation for what goes into a single bottle of tequila.

Then came the tastings… and wow, did they go all out. There were soooo many tequila samples and shots being passed around, I didn’t even try to keep up. 

People were getting tipsy fast – some even drunk before noon. I kept it chill (I’m honestly not a big drinker and can’t handle my liquor anymore), so I just tasted a few of the more unique varieties. My favorites? The coffee-infused tequila and some of the fruit-flavored ones – sweet, smooth, and dangerously sippable.

Stop #3: Tequila Town and Market Lunch

After all that, we finally made our way into the town of Tequila itself. We had free time to stroll around the main square, shop for souvenirs, and snap a few pics with the oversized colorful “TEQUILA” letters. The vibe was festive and lively – mariachi music drifting through the air, colorful flags overhead, and plenty of street vendors and tequila bars if you wanted to keep the party going.

Instead of a sit-down meal, I opted to eat at the local market in Tequila, which was absolutely buzzing with energy. I grabbed a plate of juicy birria tacos (so good!) and some fresh tortillas while listening to a live mariachi band perform right there in the food hall. 

Just know that mariachi isn’t free – if you linger, record a video, or they stop by your table, it’s expected that you’ll leave a small tip. Totally worth it for the ambiance. 

Stop #4: Cantaritos El Güero

To wrap up the day, we made one final stop: Cantaritos El Güero, a roadside bar that was way more of a full-on experience than I expected. Think music blasting (and tons of dancing), bartenders pouring tequila from two feet above your cup, and a party atmosphere like no other. Overwhelming to say the least, especially if you don’t know what to expect.

Everyone comes for the signature drink – the cantarito – a citrusy tequila cocktail made with grapefruit soda, lime, orange, and salt, all served in a massive clay mug. You can choose your cup size (they get beyond huge and wildly expensive), and it’s the kind of drink that feels celebratory from the very first sip. Such a fun and hilarious way to cap off the day.

Thankfully I made friends with everyone on my tour; I don’t think it’s the kind of place you enjoy solo, haha.

Psst — Cantaritos El Güero is between Tequila Town and Guadalajara, so make sure you have a ride back if you’re not going on a tour.

What to Know Before You Go:

  • If you want to ride the Jose Cuervo Express tequila train, it’s a super scenic option, but it only runs on Saturdays – and tickets go fast (and they’re expensive).
  • Other great distilleries to check out if you go on your own: La Rojeña (Jose Cuervo), Casa Herradura, Cava de Oro, and La Cofradía.
  • Bring cash for the market, tips for mariachi, and water – you’ll need it after all that tequila.
  • Don’t forget sunscreen and a hat if you plan to wander the fields or town for long.

By the time we rolled back into Guadalajara, I was overly exhausted. If you’re planning to drink a lot, I definitely wouldn’t make any plans for tonight, haha. 

Day 3: Day Trip to Tlaquepaque

Up next on this Guadalajara itinerary – Tlaquepaque (pronounced tlah-keh-PAH-keh, you’re welcome, lol)! 

And it couldn’t be easier to get to, as it’s just 15 minutes from central Guadalajara (via Uber for about 150 MXN / ~$7 USD). While many think it’s simply a neighborhood of Guadalajara, Tlaquepaque is actually its own municipality – and one brimming with artistic flair, colonial charm, and mariachi magic.

Expect pedestrian-friendly cobblestone streets, shady plazas, beautifully preserved buildings, and loads of local art. It’s considered the creative and cultural capital of the Guadalajara area for good reason. And it reminded me so much of other small Mexican towns I love, namely Todos Santos, San Miguel de Allende, and even Oaxaca (which I’m dying to get back to sooner than later)!

While you can easily spend all day exploring Tlaquepaque, I found just a few hours was plenty – which gives you time to check out other spots in Guadalajara earlier in the day, which is what I did.

Morning Stop: Casa ITESO Clavigero (in Guadalajara)

Before heading to Tlaquepaque, I made a quick cultural pit stop at Casa ITESO Clavigero, located in the quiet Colonia Americana neighborhood. Before visiting Guadalajara, I didn’t realize that Luis Barragán (a famous architect in Mexico) designed any buildings here. 

I had seen his way-more-popular houses (including Casa Gilardi and Casa Estudio Luis Barragán, both in Mexico City), so was thrilled to learn that one of his early works is tucked away right here in Guadalajara.

Built in the late 1920s, the house is a stunning example of regional Tapatío architecture – full of clean lines, natural light, and minimalist elegance. I will say it didn’t wow me as much as the others in CDMX did, but I was still happy to see it.

Casa ITESO Clavigero was originally the private home of Mexican philosopher and politician Efraín González Luna, and it now serves as a cultural center owned by the Jesuit university ITESO. It’s free to enter and usually hosts rotating art and architecture exhibits, as well as gardens you can stroll through. 

Architecture lovers, don’t skip this – it’s considered a National Artistic Monument. There’s even a cafe inside if you need an early morning coffee.

Late Morning & Afternoon in Tlaquepaque

Hop in an Uber and head straight to the heart of Tlaquepaque. It’s compact and very walkable, so you won’t need to plan much – just wander and enjoy without a real plan. I promise you’ll eventually run into everything, haha. But here’s a few things not to miss!

  • Walk Calle Independencia: This is the town’s charming main street (pedestrian-only!), and full of artisan shops, colorful galleries, and whimsical sculptures. Expect handmade ceramics, blown glass, leather goods, and a lot of local color – literally. I loved getting a mango ice cream (mmm my favorite!) and wandering around.
  • Try a Tuba: Nope, not the instrument! Tuba is a unique regional drink made from fermented coconut sap, and it’s typically topped with chopped peanuts and fruit candies. It’s sweet, refreshing, and something you won’t find just anywhere. You’ll see locals selling these right on the street!
  • Go shopping at Plaza de Artesanías: A small square with a handful of shops to buy local Mexican crafts. I found some super cute keychains here, and loved taking photos of the popular umbrellas hanging overhead.
  • Pop into Sergio Bustamante’s Gallery: This surrealist sculptor is famous for his oddball creations, and his flagship gallery here is as whimsical as it is thought-provoking. From wide-eyed papier-mâché children to fantastical creatures, it’s one of the coolest spots in town.
  • El Refugio of Tlaquepaque: On normal days, you can tour and photograph the photogenic rooftop of El Refugio of Tlaquepaque. But it just so happened that a special marketplace was happening the day I was there so the rooftop was unfortunately closed.
  • Lunch at Restaurante Casa Luna: Come for the food, stay for the setting. The space is a stunner, filled with mosaic tilework, plants, ceiling mobiles, and twinkling lights. There’s often live music, and the menu features upscale takes on traditional Mexican cuisine.
  • Visit the Ceramic Markets: Tlaquepaque is a ceramics hub, and even if you don’t plan on buying anything, the markets are worth a browse. You’ll find both contemporary and traditional styles — perfect for a little window shopping or unique souvenirs.
  • Wrap up at El Parián: This massive open-air cantina is said to be the biggest bar in Mexico, and it’s more of an experience than a single venue. Dozens of small bars and restaurants circle a central gazebo where live mariachi bands play throughout the day. Don’t leave without trying a cazuela – a giant tequila-based citrus cocktail served in a clay bowl with fruit slices. It’s the town’s signature drink and super refreshing. I have to admit this spot is crazy touristy and it was kinda dead when I visited, so I opted to skip it and just took a quick glance. Although I do think it’d be more fun with friends later on in the day.

Day 4: Day Trip to Lake Chapala and Ajijic

On your last day of your Guadalajara itinerary, it’s time to once again, get outta the city, this time for some lakeside charm! No shortage of day trips here, haha. Psst: if you can, I’d recommend visiting on a weekday, as it gets very busy on weekends and understandably so.

Just an hour outside of Guadalajara, this scenic region feels like a totally different world – think colorful colonial towns, peaceful water views, and a pace of life that’s way slower than the city.

This day trip includes a little bit of everything: tequila tastings, boat rides, artisan shopping, and sunset strolls. You’ll get to explore Ajijic, a quirky artist enclave with serious Pueblo Mágico energy, and Chapala, a traditional lakeside town with a great malecón for people-watching and photo ops. It’s one of the most popular and well-rounded excursions from Guadalajara – and after spending a full day exploring the area, I totally get why.

I really recommend taking a guided day tour to this area; having a guide made the whole experience super smooth and stress-free, especially since the towns are spread out and not super easy to navigate on your own without a car.

This is the exact day trip tour to Lake Chapala and Ajijic that I took, and thought it was great value for money! The tour first took us to a tequila factory, had lunch overlooking the lake, then took a boat ride on Lake Chapala, visited the magical town of Ajijic, and finally ended with sunset in Chapala town. A fantastic and very full day!

Stop #1: Tequila Factory Visit

Yes, more tequila! It’s hard to get away from it around here, haha! This one wasn’t quite as flashy as the big-name spots near Tequila, but way more intimate. I loved getting a behind-the-scenes look at the process and chatting with the staff, who clearly knew their stuff (and were very generous with the samples). Definitely a great little bonus before the main events of the day.

Stop #2: Seafood Lunch Overlooking the Lake

The tour took us to a restaurant right on the lake, called Mariscos El Carnal. I typically scoff at restaurants on tours, but this was actually pretty decent! 

We sat upstairs with a lovely view of Chapala Lake, and loved the light breeze. The menu had so much to choose from (it was actually a bit overwhelming), with a big emphasis on seafood (which makes sense considering it’s a seafood restaurant, haha). Lots of shrimp, ceviches, octopus (my favorite!), and shellfish platters.

I wouldn’t necessarily choose to eat there if I wasn’t on a tour, but it was good enough, haha. And the views couldn’t have been better.

Stop #3: Boat Ride on Lake Chapala

Next up was a breezy boat ride on Lake Chapala, Mexico’s largest freshwater lake. With the Sierra Madre mountains in the background and pelicans flying overhead, it was a peaceful way to take in the views and learn a bit about the local ecosystem. 

Our guide pointed out a few small islands and shared stories about the region’s history – super interesting and not something I would’ve learned on my own. The boat ride was short but felt like it was long enough.

Stop #4: Stroll Through Ajijic, The Artsy Pueblo Mágico by the Lake

From there, we made our way to Ajijic (pronounced ah-hee-HEEK), one of Jalisco’s designated Pueblos Mágicos. This is a title given to towns with special cultural, historical, or natural significance – and it definitely earns its name. 

This lakeside village has become a bit of a haven for artists, creatives, and expats (especially from the U.S. and Canada), but still retains its authentic small-town Mexican charm.

What makes Ajijic stand out is its colorful, creative energy. The streets are covered in murals – seriously, nearly every wall bursts with color and character. The town has a strong art scene, with plenty of little galleries and studios to duck into, as well as artisan markets where you can find everything from handmade textiles to quirky sculptures.

It’s also just incredibly walkable. You can stroll the cobblestone streets at your own pace, pop into cute cafés, and admire the colonial architecture framed by jacaranda trees (especially beautiful in spring when they bloom purple!). The main plaza is often buzzing with live music or small events, and there’s always a relaxed, easygoing vibe.

I can totally see why so many expats live here – there’s year-round spring-like weather and oh so gorgeous setting right on the shores of Lake Chapala, backed by the Sierra del Tigre mountains. Unfortunately this makes the town exceptionally pricey, so don’t plan on buying any souvenirs here as everything is at least triple the price.

Stop #5: Sunset in Chapala Town

Chapala town is the perfect place to end a day trip from Guadalajara – laid-back, scenic, and full of local charm. It’s the largest town on the shores of Lake Chapala (Mexico’s biggest freshwater lake), and it feels way more traditional than Ajijic, with less of the expat/artsy vibe and more of that authentic, everyday Mexico energy.

We got here just in time for sunset along the malecón (lakefront promenade). There were snack stands (don’t miss a refreshing raspados – shaved ice), local families out for a walk, and a golden glow over the water that made for a perfect photo op. It was the kind of spot where you could just sit, sip a cold drink, and soak it all in. And that we did!

Chapala also has a cute main plaza and a handful of shops selling local handicrafts. I also noticed some cool murals scattered around the town. Overall, it’s super walkable and makes for a relaxing, photogenic final stop before heading back to Guadalajara.

All in all, this day trip was super well-paced and a great way to experience another side of Jalisco. If you’ve got the time, I’d definitely recommend adding it to your Guadalajara itinerary!

Hope this helps you plan the perfect Guadalajara itinerary! Are you headed to Mexico anytime soon?!



The post The Perfect Guadalajara Itinerary: 4 Days in Guadalajara appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/guadalajara-itinerary-4-days/feed/ 0
An Epic El Salvador Itinerary: Volcano Hikes, Pupusas, and Pacific Sunsets https://apassionandapassport.com/el-salvador-itinerary/ https://apassionandapassport.com/el-salvador-itinerary/#respond Thu, 15 May 2025 05:01:44 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32311 Hoping to plan the perfect El Salvador itinerary?! You’re in the right place. This small but mighty Central American country totally blew me away – in all the best ways possible! I promise you, from surf towns and steamy volcanoes to cheesy pupusas and colonial charm, there’s a lot to love here.  In this post,Continue Reading

The post An Epic El Salvador Itinerary: Volcano Hikes, Pupusas, and Pacific Sunsets appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Hoping to plan the perfect El Salvador itinerary?! You’re in the right place. This small but mighty Central American country totally blew me away – in all the best ways possible! I promise you, from surf towns and steamy volcanoes to cheesy pupusas and colonial charm, there’s a lot to love here. 

In this post, I’ll help you map out an epic El Salvador itinerary, plus where to stay, what to eat, and everything in between. Let’s dive in!

Imagine volcanic peaks rising behind lush jungles. Black sand beaches dotted with surfers and coconuts. Colorful pueblos with cobblestone streets and murals splashed across adobe walls. And you can’t forget about the pupusas, fresh fruits, and ice-cold coconut water, of course! El Salvador may be tiny, but it’s bursting with dramatic landscapes and vibrant culture. And I loved every second of it (including the sizzling tropical heat).

To be honest, El Salvador hadn’t been on my radar for very long. I always assumed it was way too risky to visit, so didn’t even entertain the idea of going. But when things started taking a massive turn, I instantly put it on my bucket list. 

I’d been to other countries in Central America (Guatemala, Belize, and Panama thus far) and LOVED them, so knew I needed to check out El Salvador eventually. So when I saw nonstop flights to San Salvador from SFO (my home airport), I bought those tickets right up and started planning my El Salvador itinerary!

I spent just over a week in El Salvador and honestly, I was surprised by how much I loved it. The landscapes are insanely diverse for such a small country – one day I was hiking a volcano, the next I was lounging on the black sand beaches of El Tunco with a fresh watermelon juice in hand. It’s affordable, packed with adventure, and still flying under the radar for most travelers, which means fewer crowds and a more authentic vibe all around. A perfect combination in my book!

So let’s get to it – the most perfect El Salvador itinerary coming right up! But first, some important logistics.

Week in El Salvador Itinerary Logistics

This El Salvador itinerary starts in the capital city of San Salvador, makes a few day trips (including a spectacular volcano hike), and ends by the beach in El Tunco. It’s a wildly varied itinerary, offering a little bit of everything – from cultural exploration to natural wonders (my fave!) and beachside relaxation.

Where is El Salvador and How To Get There

El Salvador is a compact but diverse country in Central America, bordered by Guatemala to the west, Honduras to the north and east, and the Pacific Ocean to the south. It’s the only Central American country without a Caribbean coastline, but what it lacks there, it makes up for with nearly 200 miles of Pacific shoreline, perfect for surfing and beach-hopping. The country is roughly the size of Massachusetts, which means you can go from misty mountain towns to black-sand beaches in just a couple of hours.

How to Get to El Salvador

Flying Internationally 

Of course you’ve gotta get yourself there! 

You’ll be flying into San Óscar Arnulfo Romero International Airport (SAL), the only international airport in the country. And since El Salvador is so tiny, it’s sandwiched about 45 minutes from both the capital and the coast!

The airport is well-connected to major cities in North and South America, as well as some destinations in Europe. If you’re flying from the US, you’ll find direct flights from cities like Miami, Los Angeles, and Houston, with flight times ranging from 3 to 6 hours depending on where you’re flying from. 

Coming from San Francisco, I was able to take a nonstop flight directly from San Salvador on Avianca. I thought flights were a decent price (I paid around $500 roundtrip with a checked bag). 

Note that Avianca is technically a budget airline so expect to pay for literally everything like bags and even drinks (water/soda) on the plane. Yup, they don’t even hand out water… (although you can always ask for a courtesy water which I think they have to give you).

Coming from Elsewhere in Central America 

Already in Central America?! Getting to El Salvador is super easy (so yup, it’s a great addition if you’re planning a longer Latin American trip). If you’re coming from neighboring Guatemala or Honduras, buses are a popular option, though the ride can take anywhere from 3 to 6 hours, depending on where you’re traveling from of course. Including San José (Costa Rica), Managua (Nicaragua), and Antigua (Guatemala). 

There’s also daily flights from nearby countries (such as Costa Rica, Guatemala, and Nicaragua), available to the San Salvador International Airport.

Visas in El Salvador

Most visitors to El Salvador can skip the visa process and just grab a Tourist Card when they land or cross a border. It’s a quick $12 fee, and it gives you 90 days to explore the country (although I got lucky and was granted 180 days!). 

You can get the card at airports, border crossings, or seaports – super easy. Just remember, your passport needs to be valid for at least six months beyond your trip. Some countries are exempt from this fee or may need to get a visa ahead of time, so double-check before you go!

How to Get Around El Salvador

Uber: I used Uber as my main mode of transport, and honestly, it was great. I felt prices were super fair – like, a 45-minute ride cost me about $10. The priciest Uber I took was from San Salvador to El Tunco, which was about ~$40 or so. 

I always prefer Uber so I know exactly what I’m paying upfront and there’s no communication barriers (since my Spanish is still kinda subpar, although I’m definitely getting better). Uber is thankfully available in the major tourist areas of El Salvador, and I found it way more convenient than dealing with taxis or trying to figure out chicken buses/public transit.

Shuttle Buses: When I first arrived in San Salvador, I used a private shuttle transfer to get to my hotel. It was late at night and I didn’t wanna chance an Uber costing more than it should be. Plus, whenever I travel solo, I like that security knowing I have a trusted company picking me up.

Taxis: Traditional taxis are easy to find, especially in urban areas. They’re also a safe and reliable way to get around, but be sure to negotiate the fare or insist that they use the meter, as taxi prices can vary. Always try to grab a taxi from a reputable spot, like a hotel or a taxi stand. 

To be honest, if you don’t speak Spanish, I’d stick with Ubers so there’s less of a chance you end up in the wrong place, haha. 

Renting a Car: Renting a car is a great choice if you plan to explore more remote parts of El Salvador. Most roads are paved and in decent condition, but be prepared for plenty of speed bumps (or “topes”), especially in towns and on quieter roads. Some are clearly marked, but others might sneak up on you, so stay alert! 

Keep in mind that El Salvador now has a zero-tolerance alcohol policy – meaning no driving if you’ve had even one drink. I personally LOVE this and think more countries should adopt this policy. 

As for getting around San Salvador, expect heavy traffic, especially during rush hours. Always give yourself more time than you think you’ll need to get in and out of the city! If I wasn’t traveling solo I think I’d consider renting a car, but it wasn’t something I was interested in doing myself.

Public Buses: El Salvador’s public buses are an experience in and of themselves. You’ll mostly be hopping on the famous “chicken buses” – old American school buses decked out in bright colors (which you’ll also see all over Guatemala as well). 

They’re cheap and take you just about anywhere, but they’re not the most comfortable or reliable option if you’re in a hurry. They’re definitely a fun way to dive into the local culture though – just don’t expect luxury!

Day trip tours: I took a few day trips that included transportation and they were amazing! It’s a great way to see more of the country without worrying about logistics or renting a car. 

Many tours offer hotel pickup and drop-off, so it’s super convenient – especially if you’re not keen on navigating the roads yourself. Plus, I learned so much from my local guides, and they gave me some of the best food recommendations of the whole trip!

When to Plan Your El Salvador Itinerary

El Salvador has a tropical climate, so expect heat and humidity, especially in the lowlands. Like other tropical warm weather destinations, El Salvador kinda has two main seasons – dry season and wet season. (Psst – you’ll most likely wanna go during dry season, wink wink).

When planning your El Salvador itinerary, the best time to visit is from November through February. This period falls within the dry season, where you can expect sunny days, clear skies, and comfortable temperatures, perfect for exploring the country’s beaches, volcanoes, and cultural sites. The weather is warm but not too hot, making it ideal for outdoor adventures, from surfing to hiking.

March and April can be pretty hot, especially along the coast, which I found surprising since inland areas are usually the hottest during my other travels. The coastal heat is more intense, and the humidity can be pretty unbearable at times, making it a bit uncomfortable for extended outdoor activities. 

That said, prices tend to be a bit lower compared to the peak dry season, so if you can handle the heat and humidity, you might score some deals while avoiding large crowds.

For reference, I visited the end of March to early April, and had mostly perfect weather. Yes, it was hot and steamy along the coast (I almost melted), and I experienced one massive rainstorm, but all in all no major complaints.

The rainy season in El Salvador runs from May to October. While the rain usually comes in short afternoon showers, it can still put a damper on beach days or hiking. However, the rain brings lush greenery and fewer tourists, so if you prefer a quieter, more budget-friendly experience, this time of year can work – just be prepared for a more unpredictable climate.

Coastal areas can be particularly damp during this time, so if you’re planning to explore the beaches, consider a light jacket and quick-dry gear. But the rain isn’t all bad – it cools things off a bit and brings out the vibrant green of El Salvador’s forests and farmlands, so the scenery is lush and beautiful, even if the rain occasionally puts a halt to outdoor plans.

Is a Week in El Salvador Enough?

I think so – but only if you plan it right! This little Central American country is packed with adventure, and while it’s smaller than most US states, there’s honestly tons to do. 

With just a week in El Salvador, you can surf world-class waves in El Tunco, hike up an active volcano (hey, Santa Ana), explore colorful colonial towns like Suchitoto, swim in crater lakes, and maybe even squeeze in a pupusa-making class. It’s fast-paced, sure, but totally doable. 

Just don’t expect to cover every corner of the country – this El Salvador itinerary hits the highlights without making you feel rushed. If you’ve got more time, even better – but for a one-week trip? You’re golden.

For reference, I spent exactly a week in El Salvador, and felt it was the perfect amount of time. Sure, I would’ve been fine with an extra few days, but I really feel like I saw 90% of what I wanted in that short time frame (I decided to skip Suchitoto because I didn’t feel like dealing with a long-ish bus ride).

Health and Safety in El Salvador

Ahhh – the million dollar question. Is El Salvador even safe to visit? 10 years ago when I first visited nearby Guatemala I had a layover in San Salvador (El Salvador’s capital city) and was low-key freaking out. IN THE AIRPORT. But now it’s completely different.

It’s true; the country has a more-than horrible reputation. I mean, it used to be known as the Murder Capital of the World (yup…). Friends and family were questioning why I even considered visiting El Salvador for a vacation

I get it, BUT the recent reality is WAY different and a lot more nuanced than the outdated reputation suggests.

In recent years, El Salvador has undergone a massive shift when it comes to safety. Thanks to major reforms and a crackdown on gang activity, crime rates – especially violent crime – have dropped significantly. 

While the country used to be considered one of the most dangerous in the world, that narrative is quickly changing, and fast. Tourism is on the rise, and travelers (myself included!) are starting to see the country in a totally different light.

Safety in El Salvador has improved dramatically in recent years, and it’s all thanks to the country’s current president, Nayib Bukele. Since taking office in 2019, he’s launched an aggressive crackdown on gang violence – most notably through his controversial “state of emergency” in 2022. That allowed mass arrests (we’re talking over 70,000 alleged gang members) and the creation of a massive mega-prison to hold them. 

The result? Homicide rates are now at historic lows, and in 2025, the U.S. even updated El Salvador’s travel advisory to a Level 1 (the safest rating). To put things in perspective, at the time of writing, France and Turks & Caicos are at Level 2… 

Of course, it’s not without criticism – some human rights groups have raised concerns about civil liberties and due process. But from a traveler’s point of view? El Salvador feels safer than it has in decades. To be honest, I felt totally safe traveling throughout El Salvador, and even safer than I do at home walking the streets of San Francisco (or any other large city in the USA). And this includes everywhere I went, even at night walking around Zona Rosa as a solo female traveler. 

The locals were warm, welcoming, and genuinely excited to see travelers discovering their country. Like anywhere, stay aware of your surroundings and keep your valuables secure – but overall, you’ll likely be pleasantly surprised by just how chill it feels.

That said, common sense goes a long way here. Petty theft can still happen (like anywhere), so don’t flash valuables, keep your belongings secure, and stay aware of your surroundings – especially in crowded areas or public transport. Stick to well-reviewed accommodations and use registered taxis or rideshare apps instead of random cabs. And if you’re heading into more remote areas or volcano hikes, always go with a guide.

As with any destination, be smart, stay alert, and do your research – but don’t let fear stop you from experiencing this beautiful (and wildly underrated) country.

Is El Salvador safe for a solo female traveler?

I’d say, yes, it’s safe. I traveled throughout El Salvador as a 30-something solo female and would have no hesitations going again. 

However, I’d recommend this destination for experienced solo travelers only. Meaning, I wouldn’t make El Salvador the first place you ever travel solo. 

Not necessarily because of safety, but because of other inconveniences and challenges – namely unpredictable public transportation, limited access to reliable Wi-Fi, a lack of widespread English speakers (possibly causing language barriers), and a lack of consistent infrastructure in more remote areas.

Health in El Salvador

Health-wise, El Salvador’s pretty straightforward for most travelers, but there’s a few things to keep in mind of course.

Vaccinations: You don’t need any special vaccines to enter El Salvador, but the CDC recommends being up to date on your routine shots – think Hepatitis A and B, typhoid (especially if you’re adventurous with food), and tetanus. 

Malaria isn’t a big concern in most tourist areas, but dengue fever is present, so bring insect repellent (with DEET or picaridin) and wear long sleeves and pants when you can – especially if you’re spending time in more rural or coastal areas.

Water: The tap water here generally isn’t safe to drink. Most locals don’t even drink it. Stick to bottled or filtered water for drinking and brushing your teeth (although I used tap for the latter and was completely fine). 

Many hotels and Airbnbs provide purified water – some even have water coolers or large jugs you can refill from. It’s smart to travel with a reusable water bottle that has a built-in filter (like a Grayl or Lifestraw) for peace of mind.

Street food: El Salvador is a pupusa paradise, and street food is often totally fine to eat – but trust your gut (pun intended). Stick to vendors with high turnover, eat food that’s cooked fresh and served hot, and skip raw stuff if you’re not sure about the cleanliness.

A small travel medicine kit with anti-diarrheal meds, electrolytes, and a probiotic can go a long way, especially if you have a sensitive stomach. I ate street food in both El Tunco and San Salvador and had zero stomach issues thankfully. 

Healthcare access: In El Salvador, clinics and antibiotics are free for citizens and even tourists (a welcome surprise!). Still, make sure you’ve got travel insurance that covers medical emergencies just in case. Better be safe than sorry of course!

Other El Salvador Itinerary FAQs

Currency in El Salvador

El Salvador uses two official currencies: the U.S. dollar (including $1 coins) and the Bitcoin (yes, crypto!). While the U.S. dollar has been the main currency since 2001 (previously the colon), the country made headlines in 2021 by adopting Bitcoin as legal tender, becoming the first country in the world to do so (!!!). Kinda wild!

While Bitcoin is gaining ground, especially in El Zonte, aptly named “Bitcoin Beach”, the U.S. dollar remains the dominant currency for most transactions. If you’re visiting, you’ll find that cash is king, but don’t be surprised if some places start offering Bitcoin payment options.

Cash vs. Card: While credit and debit cards are widely accepted in major cities and tourist areas, it’s always a good idea to carry cash when venturing out to smaller towns or more remote areas. You’ll definitely want some small bills and $1 coins (yes, they’re used here!) for market purchases and street vendors. 

ATMs are easy to find in cities, but just be sure to withdraw enough cash for your day trips, as some rural spots may not have reliable ATM access.

Tipping in El Salvador: Tipping in El Salvador is appreciated but not mandatory. The standard tipping rate is around 10% of your bill in restaurants and cafes, which I gladly gave. If the service is exceptional, feel free to tip more! 

Language in El Salvador

Spanish is the official language of El Salvador, and you’ll hear it everywhere – from the streets to the markets to the restaurants. So, if you know some basic Spanish, you’ll have no trouble getting around! 

That said, there are a few indigenous Mayan languages like Nahuatl still spoken in rural areas, though you’re not likely to hear them much unless you’re deep in the countryside. 

My Spanish is pretty basic – I can get by with simple conversations and can understand a bit more – but I quickly realized that many locals speak little to no English. Even hotel staff and restaurant employees often knew just a few words or none at all. I noticed that English wasn’t as commonly spoken here compared to other parts of Latin America. 

So, if you’re planning a trip, definitely brush up on a few basic Spanish phrases to make life easier! A few helpful phrases to start you off:

  • Hola = Hello
  • Adios = Goodbye
  • Buenos dias = Good morning
  • Buenas tardes = Good afternoon 
  • Buenas noches = Good night
  • Cuanto cuesta? = How much does it cost?
  • Cómo te llamas? = What is your name?
  • Me llamo… = My name is…
  • Soy de… = I am from…
  • Cerveza = Beer
  • La cuenta, por favor? = The check, please?
  • Muchas gracias = Thank you so much
  • Para llevar = take away

Where to Stay in El Salvador

If you’re planning to explore a few different regions of El Salvador (and you should!), I highly recommend splitting your stay between the beach and the city. I based myself in El Tunco and San Salvador, and that combo worked out perfectly. 

Here’s a quick breakdown of where to stay depending on your travel style and itinerary:

El Tunco: Chill Surf Vibes & Sunset Magic

If you’re craving beachy energy and laid-back days, El Tunco is the place to be. This tiny coastal town is known for surfing, sunsets, and smoothie bowls, and it’s super walkable. I stayed here for four nights and honestly could’ve stayed longer. 

Accommodations range from budget hostels with social vibes to boutique hotels and beachfront resorts. Just know it gets busy on weekends (locals love it too), so definitely book ahead if you’re coming in high season.

I stayed at Casa Makoi in El Tunco ($), a cute guest house which was the perfect spot to relax after days in the sweltering sun. It’s less than a 5-minute walk from the beach (literally down the street) and right in the center of town (meaning plenty of restaurants and pupusas). Plus, the owner’s dog Pepe was so cute!

They made a killer made-to-order breakfast every morning – I loved my desayuno típico (eggs, beans, plantains, and toast)! And there’s a cute little plunge pool that I totally took advantage of almost every afternoon. The perfect spot for a gal traveling solo!

If I was traveling with friends or my husband, I would’ve chosen Balance Surf Yoga Retreat, Boca Olas Resort & Villas, or Hotel Casa Miramar El Tunco. I was trying to save a bit of money since I have tons of travel coming up, haha. 

  • Pro tip: Many places include surfboard rentals or can hook you up with a local instructor. If you want a pool, there’s great options that still keep the beach-town charm.
  • Wi-Fi was decent in most places, and I always felt safe walking around solo.

San Salvador: City Base for Day Trips & Culture

San Salvador might not be love-at-first-sight, but hear me out: it’s absolutely worth a stay. I used it as a hub for day trips (like the Santa Ana Volcano and Ruta de los Flores), and it worked beautifully. I stayed at Hotel Citlalli in the Zona Rosa/San Benito area, which is modern, clean, and packed with restaurants, coffee shops, and grocery stores. It’s also one of the safest neighborhoods in the city and super walkable. 

I also contemplated staying at Barceló San Salvador, but decided to save some cash so opted for Hotel Citlalli.

  • Bonus: There’s free walking tours and tons of cultural spots right in the city.
  • Uber makes it really easy to get around, and most hotels are well-versed in helping with tours and transportation (although English is a bit lacking).

Other Places to Stay in El Salvador

  • Santa Ana: The perfect base for volcano adventures! If you want to stay closer to the Santa Ana Volcano or Coatepeque Lake, consider spending a night or two in Santa Ana. It’s a pretty town with a striking Gothic cathedral and a more local feel. I didn’t stay overnight here, but it’s a solid option for breaking up your travel days.
  • Ruta de los Flores: Wanna sleep in a flower-filled mountain town?! Though I only visited Ruta de los Flores as a day trip, lots of people choose to stay a night or two in one of the small towns along the route. Juayúa, Apaneca, and Ataco are all great options with charming guesthouses, boutique hotels, and local markets. Staying here means you can enjoy the food festivals (if you’re lucky enough to be there on a weekend), go coffee tasting, or just soak up the peaceful small-town vibe.
  • El Zonte: This is the perfect (quiet!) coastal escape! If El Tunco’s a little too busy for your taste, head to El Zonte. It’s just 15–20 minutes down the road but way more chill. El Zonte has a strong surf culture and a growing ecotourism scene. Think yoga retreats, boutique hostels, and slower beach days. Great for relaxing, surfing, or just avoiding crowds.

What to Eat in El Salvador 

El Salvador may be small (I know I keep saying that, haha), but its food scene is full of bold flavors and comforting, homey dishes you won’t forget. From cheesy pupusas to hearty soups and sweet plantain treats, there’s a whole lot to love (and eat!) here. Come hungry – you’re gonna wanna try everything. 

For the record, I ate over a dozen pupusas during my week in El Salvador – I just couldn’t get enough! So fresh and gooey and delicious!

  • Pupusas: The national dish! Thick corn tortillas stuffed with cheese, beans, chicharrón (pork), or loroco (an edible flower). Always served with curtido (a tangy cabbage slaw) and tomato salsa.
  • Yuca frita: Fried cassava root, often served with chicharrón and curtido. Super crispy on the outside, soft inside.
  • Pan con pollo: A Salvadoran-style chicken sandwich with roasted chicken, fresh veggies, and a flavorful tomato sauce, all tucked into crusty bread.
  • Tamales: Made with corn dough (masa) and filled with chicken, pork, or veggies, then steamed in banana leaves for extra flavor.
  • Sopa de res: A hearty beef soup with chunks of corn, yucca, carrots, and cabbage. Total comfort food.
  • Sopa de gallina india: Traditional country-style chicken soup, rich and flavorful, often made with free-range hen.
  • Empanadas de plátano: Not your average empanada. These are made with sweet mashed plantains, filled with either sweet milk custard or beans, and lightly fried.
  • Riguas: Griddled corn cakes made from fresh corn, sometimes with cheese inside. Great as a snack or side.
  • Atol de elote: A warm, sweet corn-based drink (kinda like drinking a creamy corn pudding). Cozy and super traditional.
  • Fresco de ensalada: A refreshing fruit drink made with finely chopped apples, pineapple, and other fruits floating in a lightly sweet juice (kinda like in Tlaquepaque in Guadalajara, MX).
  • Elote loco: “Crazy corn” slathered in mayo, ketchup, mustard, cheese, and hot sauce. Wild, messy, and oddly addictive. Similar but different to my fave elote I love in Mexico City

And now, what you’ve been waiting for, a complete week in El Salvador itinerary! 

The Best One Week in El Salvador Itinerary

But first, a few notes about this El Salvador itinerary.

  • This El Salvador itinerary assumes you have a full 7 days in El Salvador. Meaning if your flight arrives mid-day or late at night, you’ll want an extra day in order to see and do all the things on this itinerary.
  • It starts off busy, busy, busy, then gets into a more relaxed pace later on in the week. I recommend doing all your adventurous, active stuff early on in your trip, then hanging at the beach on the last few days.
  • You can technically stay in the same accommodation for the entire week in El Salvador (the country isn’t terribly large), but I liked having different areas to explore at night. Plus, certain attractions/activities just make more sense from one area vs. the other.

El Salvador Itinerary At-A-Glance

  • Day 1: San Salvador City Tour and El Boquerón
  • Day 2: Santa Ana Volcano Hike and Lunch at Coatepeque Lake
  • Day 3: Ruta de las Flores
  • Day 4: Scenic Views and Lago de Ilopango – OR – Suchitoto
  • Days 5-6: El Tunco Beach
  • Day 7: El Zonte 

Day 1: San Salvador City Tour + El Boquerón + Dinner in Zona Rosa

Your first full day in El Salvador is all about diving into the heart of the country – its capital, San Salvador. This city’s got grit, charm, history, and some surprisingly beautiful spots. It’s a great way to ease into the rhythm of El Salvador before heading off to the beaches or mountains.

Stop 1: Explore the Historic Center 

Start your morning in the bustling historic center, where old meets new in the most chaotic, colorful way. I did a walking tour around San Salvador and it was one of the highlights of my trip. 

The guide was super knowledgeable, gave great historical context, and pointed out things I’d never have noticed on my own. Plus she took us to a local market where I got the most delicious local cookies for only a few cents and then a super refreshing coconut water (in a bag)! If you’re a foodie and interested in trying some of the local foods, this food and market tour looks perfect.

You can really see so much – most highlights of San Salvador are only a few blocks away from each other. Here’s a few sights to prioritize:

  • Plaza Libertad: the heart of the city, full of locals, street vendors, and music.
  • Iglesia El Rosario: By far my favorite stop. It looks like really nothing special on the outside, but step in and you’re surrounded by rainbow-colored stained glass that arcs over the ceiling. Hands down one of the most unique churches I’ve ever seen (maybe besides that church we saw in Helsinki, Finland years back).
  • Catedral Metropolitana: massive, imposing, and holds the tomb of Archbishop Óscar Romero (a major figure in Salvadoran history).
  • National Palace and Teatro Nacional: beautiful architecture and historical significance, even if you’re just admiring from outside.

On a walking tour, you’ll also learn a ton about the civil war, the city’s resilience, and how things are changing fast in El Salvador.

Bonus: If you’re not into walking tours (they can be crowded), or just want a more structured day, there’s combo day tours that include both San Salvador and El Boquerón – some even throw in a stop at Picnic Steak House, where you can ride the Insta-famous rainbow slide with views of the city. This one got rave reviews and is super popular (book in advance for sure). Here’s another walking tour option if that one’s all booked up.

Stop 2: Parque Cuscatlán

From there, head to Parque Cuscatlán – a shady, peaceful park that feels like a little oasis in the middle of the city. Inside, you’ll find the Monumento a la Memoria y la Verdad, a long, black granite wall engraved with the names of over 75,000 people who lost their lives during the Salvadoran Civil War. It’s incredibly moving, and worth taking a few minutes to walk the length of it and reflect. This was one of those spots that really stayed with me.

There’s also a modern cultural center and some cool sculptures scattered throughout the park.

Stop 3: Pupusa Lunch

You can’t come to El Salvador and not eat pupusas. Trust me, the ones you’ve had outside the country don’t even compare. Head to Pupusería Doña Isabel or Dips Terraza for your first real taste. I’m obsessed with cheese + loroco, but revueltas (pork, beans, and cheese) are the classic. Top ‘em with spicy curtido (fermented cabbage slaw) and tomato salsa – don’t be shy.

They’re cheap, filling, and so good you’ll probably want them every day. I know I did, haha!

Stop 4: Afternoon at El Boquerón National Park

Once you’re fueled up, grab an Uber or join a tour and head to El Boquerón, a massive volcanic crater that looms over the city. It’s part of Volcán San Salvador and only about 30 – 40 minutes from the city center, but the change in scenery is wild – suddenly you’re surrounded by pine trees, cool mountain air, and panoramic views. It felt SO nice after sweating so much that morning, haha.

There’s a short loop trail that takes you around the edge of the crater with several scenic viewpoints. It’s super doable even if you’re not a hiker, just be prepared for a some steps! There’s also a couple of small stalls near the entrance selling souvenirs, snacks, and hot drinks if you get hungry.

Remember, if you’d rather come here with a tour (to get more context and such), this one includes a walking tour of downtown San Salvador, a visit to the insta-famous rainbow slide, and El Boqueron

A few tips:

  • It can get chilly up here, so bring a light layer – especially if you’re visiting in the late afternoon like we were.
  • You’ll need EXACT change. It’s $2 to enter the national park, and they do NOT take credit cards. I almost couldn’t enter because I could only scrounge up $1.90 from my pockets. Thankfully I found an extra dime lost in my purse. 

Stop 5: Dinner in Zona Rosa or San Benito

Finish your day in Zona Rosa or San Benito, two of San Salvador’s most upscale and expat-friendly neighborhoods. These areas are clean, safe, and full of great restaurants and bars. I had a delicious meal at Delikat – Italian-inspired with a leafy garden vibe – (my avocado pizza star was absolutely delicious), but there’s something for every craving – Salvadoran, sushi, steaks, you name it.

After dinner, if you’re up for it, grab drinks at Cadejo Brewing Company, Republik Bar, or Beer Station – all solid spots for a relaxed night out. Don’t miss gelato at Andián Bistro & Café (I loved it so much I went twice during my time in El Salvador) and/or coffee at Alquimia Coffee.

Day 2: Santa Ana Volcano Hike + Coatepeque Lake Lunch

Time to trade the city for volcano views! Day 2 is all about getting outside and soaking up some of El Salvador’s epic natural beauty. Trust me, this day on my El Salvador itinerary was one of my favorites.

And what a memorable and rewarding day of my trip – a perfect mix of adventure and relaxation. To make things simple, I joined a guided day tour from San Salvador that included both Santa Ana Volcano and Coatepeque Lake, and I’d totally recommend it. Not only did it make logistics easy (no stress about transportation or timing), but our guide also shared tons of cool info along the way. And it was super enjoyable hiking with other people and motivating each other to get to the top.

This is the exact Santa Ana hiking tour I joined if you’re interested in doing the same one!

Stop 1: Hike the Santa Ana Volcano (Volcán Ilamatepec)

Santa Ana Volcano (aka Volcán Ilamatepec) is the highest volcano in all of El Salvador, standing tall at over 2,300 meters (7,750 feet). And it’s one of the most iconic hikes in the country – and for good reason. 

The trail winds through cloud forests and rocky switchbacks before spitting you out at the summit, where you’re rewarded with a surreal view: a bright turquoise crater lake bubbling at the center of the volcano. It’s still considered active (the last eruption was in 2005), but don’t worry – it’s closely monitored, and hikers are only allowed to go up during safe conditions. 

We left the city around 6:30am (yes, early!) and made the 2-hour drive to Cerro Verde National Park, where the hike begins. You’ll start at the ranger station, then join a mandatory guided group hike (we started around 8:30am). 

The hike itself is about 4 hours round-trip and considered moderate. We climbed through cloud forest, rocky trails, and volcanic gravel, gaining around 1,500 feet in elevation. Don’t worry – it’s not a brutal climb, and people of all ages do it, but I definitely felt it for sure.

Not gonna lie, I was pretty nervous before the hike. Our guide mentioned that it’s not uncommon for people to turn back before reaching the top, which definitely planted some doubt. But I pushed through, used a walking stick (highly recommended!), and totally crushed it. 

I felt so proud standing at the summit, staring into the electric turquoise crater lake bubbling inside the volcano. Don’t miss a homemade paleta at the top (I had a passionfruit one and it was delicious)! Just FYI – the crater’s gases continuously smoke, so you may need to wait a bit for it to clear.

Going up was steady and challenging, but the way down was harder for me – loose rocks, wobbly legs, you get the idea – but I did it!

Need-to-knows:

  • Bring cash for park entry (~$3) if your tour doesn’t include it plus tips for the guide/s
  • It’s cooler up there, so layer up.
  • You can certainly go yourself if you can get to the base of the volcano, but you’ll still need to join a local guide (and be aware you’re only allowed to start the hike before a certain time, so plan on getting to the volcano before 10am at the latest).
  • If you’re not planning on joining a guided tour from San Salvador, I recommend spending the night beforehand in Santa Ana so you’re significantly closer to the volcano. 

Stop 2: Chill and Lunch at Lago de Coatepeque

After the hike, we drove about 45 minutes to Coatepeque Lake, a massive crater lake with stunning water that shifts from deep blue to bright emerald depending on the sunlight. It’s a total local favorite and the perfect place to unwind after the climb.

We had lunch right by the water at La Octava Maravilla – fried fish (my first time having mojarra!) and plantains just hit different after a sweaty(ish) hike. And the views, OMG! I’ll never say no to a meal overlooking a bright blue lake! I couldn’t stop taking photos, haha.

A few other spots you can check out:

  • La Pampa Restaurant 
  • Restaurante Las Palmeras
  • Tekunal Lago De Coatepeque

Some restaurants here even offer day passes to their pools or waterfront lounging areas, so bring a swimsuit if that’s your vibe. Since I was on a tour (which was amazing by the way) I didn’t get to choose the restaurant, but I was more than pleased with the one we went to. Some tours bring you to super touristy spots, so thankfully this wasn’t the case. 

Heads up: If you’re going back to San Salvador after, plan for traffic – especially on weekends. It definitely took a while to get back. Don’t make any major plans afterwards. 

I learned a lot from my guide, soaked in views I’ll never forget, and proved to myself I could conquer that hike. If you’re up for an active day with a big payoff, this one’s for you!

Once you get back to the city, you can totally hang out and grab dinner. I was honestly way too exhausted to even think about a night out though, haha. Rest and take out it was for me!

Day 3: Ruta de los Flores

Next up – an adventure west of San Salvador for a full-day tour along the iconic Ruta de los Flores – aka the Flower Route. 

What is it exactly?

A scenic mountain route that winds through five charming colonial towns: Nahuizalco, Salcoatitán, Juayúa, Apaneca, and Concepción de Ataco (most people just call it Ataco). Each town has its own personality, but they’re all incredibly colorful, covered in murals, surrounded by nature, and full of artisan markets, street food, and coffee culture.

While I didn’t make it to all five (totally understandable on a one-day trip), the towns I did explore were packed with color, culture, and most importantly, coffee!

I booked a guided day tour, which was honestly the best way to do it. Not having to drive those winding roads myself was a blessing, and our guide was amazing – super knowledgeable and fun. She shared stories about the local Indigenous communities, pointed out plants and volcanoes along the drive, and even gave us restaurant and food recommendations at each stop.

One of my favorite stops was at a 100-year-old family-run coffee farm, where I learned all about how coffee is grown, harvested, and roasted in the region. I’ve been on coffee tours before (namely Panama and Colombia), but I found it fascinating (and the tasting at the end didn’t hurt either). And the lush mountain scenery made it even better – like sipping your morning brew right in the middle of where it all begins.

We also stopped at Café Albania, one of the most instagrammable spots on the route, and I couldn’t resist trying their famous rainbow slide – yes, it’s as exhilarating as it looks. It’s pretty touristy and expensive ($10 for one ride), but I couldn’t not do it since I was right there! To be honest, I wouldn’t go all the way to the Ruta de Los Flores just for the rainbow slide, but I’m glad I got to go!

Other people in my group opted for the bike zipline (which looked equally as epic) and the canopy course, so there’s definitely something for every vibe.

If you happen to visit on a weekend, definitely time it with the Juayúa food festival – it’s held every Saturday and Sunday. Think grilled meats, pupusas, stews, and sweets all set up in a lively plaza atmosphere. I didn’t end up visiting Juayúa on the weekend, which meant I missed the famous food festival – kind of a bummer but oh well. 

Highly recommend bringing cash for souvenirs and snacks – and don’t forget your camera. You’ll definitely wanna take some pictures!

A few extra things to know about the Ruta de los Flores:

  • Best time to visit: The route is especially beautiful between November and February, when the namesake flowers are in full bloom. The roads are lined with colorful bursts of bougainvillea, wildflowers, and lush greenery – it’s honestly like driving through a painting. I went in early April and while there were some flowers still in bloom, I can’t even imagine how stunning it must be a bit earlier in the season!
  • There’s different tours to book: If you’ve got the rainbow slide on your El Salvador bucket list (like me!), sign yourself up on this tour. Other ones visit more towns, and some even make a stop at the hot springs!
  • Street art & artisan goods: Many of the towns, especially Ataco and Nahuizalco, are known for their vibrant murals and local crafts. You’ll find handwoven textiles, wood carvings, and all sorts of souvenirs that actually feel special (not touristy junk). If you love murals and colorful facades, Ataco is your town.
  • Markets & local eats: Even if you miss Juayúa’s weekend food fest like I did, there’s still loads of local spots and street vendors to try. Don’t skip pupusas from a roadside stand, or a cup of atol, a warm traditional drink made from corn. You’ll also find unique treats like yuca con chicharrón or fried plantains with crema.
  • Coffee is the star: This region is El Salvador’s coffee heartland, so take full advantage – whether that’s visiting a finca, sipping single-origin brews in a mountain café, or stocking up on beans to bring home. You’ll honestly taste the difference – smooth, rich, and so fresh.
  • Bring layers: The Ruta climbs into the mountains, so it can be cooler and breezier than the coast. I was glad I brought a light jacket for the morning.
  • Photo ops galore: Between flower-lined streets, hillside views, charming architecture, and mural-covered walls, it’s all so pretty! Have your camera or phone ready.

Day 4: Scenic Views and Pupusas with a View – OR – a Colonial Detour to Suchitoto

On my fourth day, I had two very different options in mind: either stick close to San Salvador and explore the scenic hills and local eats around Puerta del Diablo and Lago de Ilopango, or make a longer day trip to the colonial town of Suchitoto

I chose the first option – mostly because I’ve been to Antigua, Guatemala a few times, and I kept hearing Suchitoto had a similar vibe. Plus, I was trying to save a bit of money and I couldn’t find a day tour that fit my budget (cost-effective tours to Suchitoto are harder to find for solo travelers unfortunately). I could’ve taken the local bus, but Suchitoto’s kinda far and I didn’t feel like figuring out the bus situation, haha. But if you’ve never been to Antigua or you love quaint cobblestone towns and lake views, it’s still totally worth considering!

Option 1: Puerta del Diablo + Lago de Ilopango + Pupusas

What I chose! Start your day with a trip to Puerta del Diablo (“Devil’s Door”), a dramatic mountain pass just 30 minutes from the city with sweeping views of the valleys and volcanoes below. You can hike around the cliffs or just enjoy the breezy vistas – it’s stunning on a clear day. If you’re afraid of heights, fair warning: it gets steep and rocky, but you can take it at your own pace. 

Next, head over to Lago de Ilopango, a massive crater lake just east of San Salvador. I grabbed lunch at a spot overlooking the water (Cafe Santa Cruz), but there’s others like Las Tres Pedras perched up on the cliffs with panoramic views. And just like Coatepeque Lake, Ilopango is absolutely stunning. I found the lake to be especially pretty in the early afternoon when the sun hit it just right, and you might even spot some boats or jet skis out on the water.

In true travel magic fashion, I actually met a super sweet family while exploring Puerta del Diablo – they were visiting relatives in El Salvador and invited me to join them for lunch at Lago de Ilopango. I didn’t have any set plans after my morning hike, so I figured, why not? We ended up sharing a lovely lakeside meal, chatting about their favorite local spots, and soaking up the view together. It was one of those spontaneous moments that reminded me why I love solo travel so much.

Wrap up your day in Los Planes de Renderos, a scenic hilltop area known for its cool climate, pine trees, and – most importantly – pupusas! I went to Abbi Pupusería just a few minutes away from the viewpoint, and, oh my god, the view + the crispy edges on those pupusas? Unmatched. 

It’s the perfect place to wind down the day with a cold drink and a plate (or three) of your favorite fillings. I of course had my favorite bean and cheese, as well as loroco, then watched the sunset (with a view of more volcanoes!) from Los Planes de Renderos and had a chill night.

Option 2: Full Day Trip to Suchitoto

If you’re craving cobblestone streets, pastel-colored colonial buildings, and a relaxed small-town vibe, Suchitoto is a solid day trip option from San Salvador. Often called the cultural capital of El Salvador, this charming town sits about 90 minutes northeast of the city and is known for its well-preserved architecture, rich artistic traditions, and beautiful views over Lake Suchitlán.

You can explore Suchitoto on your own with a rental car, but I’d recommend booking a guided tour – especially if you’re short on time or want to pack in multiple activities. Here’s another option!

Most day tours include hotel pickup and a stop at the lake, plus time to explore the town’s highlights: the whitewashed Church of Santa Lucía (built in the 1800s), the local art galleries, and the small but interesting Museo de los Recuerdos. If you’re into handicrafts, there’s plenty of places selling indigo-dyed textiles and handmade souvenirs – since this area has a long history with indigo production. This tour even stops at the stunning Ilopango Lake as well!

Many tours also include a scenic boat ride on Lake Suchitlán (bonus: great birdwatching), or even a visit to a nearby indigo workshop where you can try dyeing your own cloth. The pace is slower here than in San Salvador, making it a perfect place to unwind and get a feel for El Salvador’s artistic side.

As noted above, I personally skipped Suchitoto this time around since I’ve been to Antigua, Guatemala a few times. But if you haven’t experienced a place like this before – or if you just want a relaxing day full of art, culture, and lake views – it’s absolutely worth considering. Next time for me!

Days 5 and 6: El Tunco

Get ready for some BEACH TIME! After bouncing around volcanoes, lakes, and colonial towns, it’s finally time to chill – and there’s no better place for it than El Tunco. 

This little beach town on El Salvador’s Pacific coast is the place to be if you’re into surfing, sunsets, and an easygoing vibe. It’s just over an hour from San Salvador but feels like a completely different world.

Unlike its neighbors, El Salvador doesn’t have a Caribbean coastline – but trust me, the rugged black sand beaches and dramatic cliffs of its Pacific shore more than make up for it. Whether you’re a seasoned surfer or a total beginner (like me), this is the perfect place to take a surf lesson or just watch the pros do their thing while you sip a cold beer on the beach. And the sunsets here? Absolutely unreal. 

The town gets its name from a funky rock formation just off the shore that looks like – you guessed it – a pig (“tunco” in Salvadoran slang). That rock becomes a silhouette superstar at sunset, when basically the entire town gathers on the beach to watch the sky turn wild shades of orange and pink. And when you’re walking around, make sure to keep your eyes peeled for toucans (!!!) — I saw a few collared aracari’s flying around (which are in the toucan family).

How to Get to El Tunco from San Salvador

It’s super easy to get here from the capital. El Tunco is just about an hour’s drive from San Salvador (give or take, depending on traffic). I used Uber to get there and back, and the prices were fair – around $40 for an hour’s ride. You can also take a private shuttle, hop on a bus (Route 102A will drop you nearby), or rent a car if you’re doing more of the country by road. 

Just be warned: El Salvador LOVES speed bumps. Like, really loves them. If you’re driving, stay alert unless you want your coffee to end up in your lap, haha.

Things to do in El Tunco

I kept my time in El Tunco pretty flexible – wandering/photographing the town, grabbing pupusas and smoothie bowls, and simply watching the waves roll in. There’s not really a “checklist” of things to do, and that’s exactly what makes it so appealing (no FOMO here). The best days here are the ones that unfold slowly – sun on your skin, salt in your hair, and a fresh coconut or cold beer in hand. 

At first I was a bit worried I’d be super bored in El Tunco, but I ended up getting into a sort of routine or so. Wake up, walk a block to the beach and watch the sunrise, snooze for another hour or so, have a delicious homemade meal at my cozy hotel, hang in a hammock for a bit and read, go for a long beach walk, get a smoothie bowl at a local cafe, wander the town, hang at a restaurant and get a watermelon juice, watch the surfers and sunset at the beach, and then grab pupusas for dinner.

But if you’re itching for some activities (I get it!), here’s what I recommend:

Take a Surf Lesson: Whether you’re a total newbie or just rusty, El Tunco is a great place to hop on a board. They don’t call it Surf City for nothing! Tons of local instructors offer affordable, low-pressure lessons, and the beach break here is known for being beginner-friendly. You’ll find solid options right in town, like Wayo Surf School, Bamboards Surf Academy, and El Tunco Surf School – all of which are super easy to book with once you arrive.

That said, don’t be surprised if your instructor suggests heading to a different beach nearby instead – the surf conditions at El Tunco can vary depending on tides and waves, so some lessons will take place in spots like El Zonte or Sunzal (just a short drive away) where the waves might be better for learning that day. It all depends on the swell, but the instructors know what they’re doing and will take you where you’ve got the best shot at standing up and catching a wave.

And if surfing’s not your thing, no worries. Post up on the beach and enjoy watching everyone else wipe out with style (that’s what I did!). It’s surprisingly entertaining. After visiting a few surf hot spots around the world (namely Bondi Beach, Australia, Sayulita/San Pancho, and now El Salvador), I can totally see why the sport is so addicting.

It just so happened that I was in town for the epic Surf City El Salvador Pro surf competition (part of the World Surf League’s Championship Tour!), which was super exciting!

Wander the Town: El Tunco is teeny-tiny, but there’s enough to explore: cute shops, smoothie stands, tattoo studios, and colorful murals tucked into every corner. You’ll probably loop around the whole town in less than 20 minutes, but that doesn’t mean it gets old. Every time I walked through, I noticed something new.

Tamanique Waterfall Day Trip: One of the best short hikes in the area, this half-day guided adventure takes you through a palm-filled canyon to a series of waterfalls (yes, you can totally swim in them!). 

It’s a bit steep in parts, especially the way back up, so wear sturdy shoes and bring plenty of water. The waterfalls are gorgeous, with smooth rocks to lounge on and cliff-jumping spots for the bold. I decided to skip this as I had just hiked a few days before and wanted to relax a bit, and to be honest, I’m not too fussed with waterfalls (they just don’t do it for me – especially if I need to hike to them, lol).

Live Music on Tuesdays at Mopelias: If your visit overlaps with a Tuesday, don’t miss this. Mopelias is one of my favorite spots in town – super chill and great food – and the live music nights are a whole vibe. Locals and travelers gather with drinks, the music’s always good, and it’s the perfect way to wind down after a beach day. I stayed a few hours with some friends I met at my hotel, and it was such a fun night!

Pool Day Passes: Not in the mood for sand in your shoes? Nearby resorts like Atami Escape Resort offer day passes with infinity pools, epic ocean views, cocktails, and loungers. There’s also Papaya Surf Garden right in town, which is super easy to access. I spent a few hours here and it was *chef’s kiss*. The change of scenery (and access to a real bathroom, let’s be honest) was so worth it.

Watch the Sunset: Seriously, don’t miss a single one. Whether you’re sitting on the beach, sipping something cold at a rooftop bar, or wandering back from dinner, the sunsets here are some of the best I’ve seen. The sky lights up in pinks and golds, and the silhouettes of surfers riding the last waves of the day? Magic.

And when I visited in early April the beach was hardly crowded at sunset! I felt like I kinda had the beach almost to myself, which is all kinds of crazy.

Nightlife: El Tunco may be tiny, but it knows how to party. There’s something happening every night – beach bonfires, bars bumping reggaeton, random dance floors, and people just vibing by the waves. I’m not a big nightlife person when I travel, but even I found myself out way later than expected, cocktail in hand, soaking up the energy.

Where to Eat/Drink in El Tunco

I’ve gotta admit, I didn’t have too many full-on meals in El Tunco. It was hot hot hot, and when I’m feeling sticky and a little gross, heavy food is the last thing I want. Instead, I kept it light with smoothie bowls, tons of fresh fruit, refreshing watermelon juice (obsessed), and of course – pupusas, because duh.

Here’s a few spots I went:

  • Esquina los Amigos: THIS is the spot to go for pupusas. And where I went every single night I was in town, haha. This little local establishment had the best pupusas I had in all of El Salvador, and I had my fair share of course. Such a large variety of flavors and fillings, including loroco (a unique edible flower), revuelta (a mix of pork, beans, and cheese), and frijoles con queso (beans with cheese).
  • Mr. Coffee: I went here my first night in El Tunco after getting in late, and while I enjoyed my smoothie, the pupusas were so-so compared to Esquina los Amigos. Just FYI. There’s lots of coffee drinks as you’d expect from the name, so a great spot to come in the AM.
  • Bao House Playa El Tunco: A great spot to go if you’re craving Asian food in Central America. Yummy dumplings and shrimp bao buns!
  • Day Cafe, Surfcafe, and Point Break Cafe: All great spots for smoothie bowls, which seem to be an extremely popular thing here in El Tunco. I had them everyday and loved them (and almost as good as the ones I’ve had in Tulum, haha).
  • Ohana Surf Cafe & Ice Cream Shop: Coffee, pastries, ice cream, and frozen bananas!
  • La Bonita Beach Club: A great spot to watch the surfers at sunset with some drinks and appetizers. Yes, it’s kinda pricey (especially for El Salvadorian standards), but I loved the super trendy decor and the views were great.

Day 7: Day Trip to El Zonte

Next up, El Zonte, a laid-back surf town about 20 minutes from El Tunco (easy to get to with a $5 Uber). It’s quieter, more relaxed (yes, even more so than nearby El Tunco), and known for its black-sand beaches, consistent waves, and unique claim to fame: Bitcoin Beach. 

Yep, El Zonte is one of the first communities in the world to fully embrace Bitcoin. You’ll see Bitcoin ATMs right in town and can actually pay for food, drinks, and even your surf lessons using crypto. It’s wild.

I actually met a sweet couple during my walking tour in San Salvador who traveled to El Salvador specifically because they wanted to use Bitcoin in real life. We ended up having dinner together and chatted all things Bitcoin for over three hours. It’s that big of a thing here – and now I’m kind of fascinated by the whole concept and starting my own research.

But back to the beach! El Zonte has a mellow vibe and is a great spot for beginner surfers or anyone just wanting to chill by the ocean. You’ll find a few surf schools in town and plenty of locals out catching waves.

If surfing’s not your thing, it’s just as nice to relax on the sand or grab a cold drink and soak up the sun. El Zonte itself is tiny but packed with personality – think vibrant murals, chill cafés, and a laid-back, surf-town rhythm. It’s kinda El Tunco’s smaller little sister, kinda like how San Pancho relates to Sayulita over in Mexico!

If you’re craving a more relaxed, resort-style vibe, El Zonte has several great options for pool day passes. Both Palo Verde Sustainable Hotel, Puro Surf Hotel, and Esencia Nativa all offer access to their pools, plus tasty food and drinks. Poolside ceviche and a cold drink? Say no more.

I started my day at Covana Seaside Kitchen, the breezy oceanfront café inside the super stylish Puro Surf Hotel. While I didn’t get a day pass there, I did sip a smoothie and snack on fresh fruit before strolling down to the beach (not without first admiring the infinity pool and coastal views for a few minutes of course – wow!).

Later in the afternoon, I got a day pass at Palo Verde and spent hours lounging in the pool, sipping fresh coconuts, and practicing my Spanish with some friendly locals. For lunch, I walked over to Palma – a laid-back café nearby in town – and had a delicious smoothie bowl. Highly recommend it. I would’ve LOVED to take a pupusa making class, but I was too busy in the pool, haha.

Psst – This wouldn’t be a complete El Salvador itinerary without the mention of Nawi Beach House in Mizata, another especially popular spot on the coast that offers day passes. BUT unless you’ve got a car or plenty of people to share an Uber with, I don’t think it’s worth the cost since it’s about an hour away and will cost a pretty penny to get there. Personally, I loved my time at Palo Verde and that was way easier (and cheaper) to get to, haha.

Hope this helps you plan the most epic El Salvador itinerary! Are you headed to Central America soon?!



The post An Epic El Salvador Itinerary: Volcano Hikes, Pupusas, and Pacific Sunsets appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/el-salvador-itinerary/feed/ 0
The Best Kona Itinerary: 3 Days in Kona, Hawaii https://apassionandapassport.com/kona-itinerary-big-island-hawaii/ https://apassionandapassport.com/kona-itinerary-big-island-hawaii/#respond Tue, 15 Apr 2025 04:49:04 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32211 Heading to Hawaii and looking for the best Kona itinerary? You’re in the right place! From snorkeling with manta rays to sipping world-famous Kona coffee, I’m covering all the must-dos, plus where to eat, where to stay, and tons of helpful tips for your trip to the Big Island! Close your eyes and think ofContinue Reading

The post The Best Kona Itinerary: 3 Days in Kona, Hawaii appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Heading to Hawaii and looking for the best Kona itinerary? You’re in the right place! From snorkeling with manta rays to sipping world-famous Kona coffee, I’m covering all the must-dos, plus where to eat, where to stay, and tons of helpful tips for your trip to the Big Island!

Close your eyes and think of Hawaii. I bet you’re imagining rugged lava rock meeting crystal-clear waters. Swaying palm trees lining sandy golden beaches. Sea turtles basking on black sand and manta rays gliding effortlessly through the water. And the food? Think shave ice, fresh poke, and some of the best coffee on the planet. A three day Kona itinerary?! Let’s do this!

After exploring Oahu, Maui, and Kauai multiple times, we figured it was finally time to check out Kona over on The Big Island. It was the last major Hawaiian island on our list, and honestly, I have no idea why we waited so long. It’s just a quick and easy flight from San Francisco (where we’re based!), yet somehow, over a decade passed between our first trip to Hawaii in 2013 and finally making it here. Better late than never, right?

After finally visiting, I can confidently say Kona has a completely different vibe from the other islands. It’s raw, rugged, and way less polished – but in the best way possible. Here’s how I’d spend 3 days in Kona and nearby. 

3 Days in Kona Itinerary Logistics

3 Days in Kona At-A-Glance

  • Day 1: Downtown Kona, Magic Sands Beach Park, night snorkel with manta rays (whatever you do, don’t miss this! — it’s absolutely EPIC)
  • Day 2: Kua Bay and/or Makalawena, Kings’ Shops in Waikoloa Village, sea turtles at Kaloko-Honokōhau, sunset drinks 
  • Day 3: Puʻuhonua o Hōnaunau, snorkel at Two Step Beach or join a catamaran tour, tour a Kona coffee farm, soak at Mamalahoa Hot Tubs, and Hawaiian Luau

Where is Kona, HI?

Kona sits on the sun-drenched western coast of Hawai’i Island, better known as the Big Island. This stretch of coastline is part of the larger Kona District, which spans much of the island’s southwest. And it’s just gorgeous!

Geographically, it sits between the Pacific Ocean to the west and the Kohala Mountains to the north, with the Mauna Loa volcano to the south. The town of Kailua-Kona, often referred to simply as “Kona,” is the heart of the region and where you’ll find not only tourists but plenty of locals. 

Unlike Hilo, which lies on the rainy, jungle-covered east coast, Kona is all about dry, sunny weather – perfect for snorkeling, diving, and lounging with a mai tai in hand. It’s about a 2.5 to 3-hour drive between the two, and while Kona is a bit removed from some of the Big Island’s major sights like Mauna Kea and Hawaii Volcanoes National Park, it makes up for it with epic ocean views, world-class coffee farms, and OMG the sunsets.

Kona isn’t Honolulu – there’s no towering skyline, no Waikiki Beach crowds, and definitely no rush-hour traffic. What will you find instead? A laid-back, beachy vibe, charming seaside restaurants, and some of the best snorkeling and manta ray night dives in the world. If you’re looking for a slower-paced, sun-soaked Hawaiian escape, Kona is exactly where you want to be.

Remember – Don’t expect to find the iconic sights of Pearl Harbor, Waikiki Beach, or the Road to Hana here – those are over on Oahu and Maui. Kona has its own kind of magic, with rugged lava fields, crystal-clear snorkeling spots, and a more laid-back, uncrowded vibe.

How to Get to Kona, HI

Getting to Kona is refreshingly easy, whether you’re flying in from the mainland, island-hopping from elsewhere in Hawaii, or even arriving by cruise ship. We’re especially lucky to be only a 5 hour non-stop flight away!

Flying to Kona 

The main gateway to the Big Island is Ellison Onizuka Kona International Airport (KOA), located just north of Kailua-Kona. It’s well-connected to major U.S. cities, with nonstop flights from the West Coast, including Los Angeles (5.5 hours), Seattle (6 hours), and San Francisco (5 hours). If you’re coming from the East Coast, expect an 11-12 hour journey with a layover – most likely in Honolulu, San Francisco, Los Angeles, or Dallas.

Flying in from another Hawaiian island? Super simple! Interisland flights on Hawaiian Airlines and Southwest connect Kona to Honolulu, Maui, and Kauai in under an hour, making it easy to add Kona to your island-hopping itinerary.

One of the things I love most about living in California is how easy it is to jet off to Hawaii for a long weekend. With multiple daily nonstop flights from San Francisco (SFO) and Los Angeles (LAX), it’s basically a five-hour flight to paradise. And because of that, we’re trying to get to Hawaii as much as humanly possible, because we may not live on the West Coast forever!

Trust me – there’s nothing like stepping off the plane in Hawaii, feeling the warm, salty air and knowing you’ve officially arrived in paradise. And just like in Palm Springs, the entire airport is practically outside and covered in palm trees!

Coming by Cruise Ship

Many longer Hawaiian cruises include a stop in Kona, typically for a day of exploring before continuing to other ports like Hilo or Maui. Since the harbor isn’t deep enough for large ships to dock, passengers take tenders (small boats) from ship to shore, adding a bit of adventure to the arrival!

How to Get Around Kona

Getting around Kona depends on where you’re staying and what you plan to do. Here’s a breakdown of your best options:

  • Walking: If you’re staying in downtown Kailua-Kona, you’re in luck – it’s super walkable. Ali‘i Drive, the scenic oceanfront road, is packed with shops, restaurants, and historic sites, making it easy to explore on foot. Just keep in mind that once you venture beyond the town center, you’ll need another mode of transport.
  • Rental Car: Highly recommended if you want to see more than just the downtown area. While Kona itself is compact, the Big Island is, well, big, and many of the best beaches and attractions aren’t within walking distance. We loved Kua Bay (more on that below), but getting there by Uber would’ve been pricey. And if you’re staying longer than 3 days in Kona, you’ll definitely want a rental car to visit places like Hawai‘i Volcanoes National Park, Pu‘uhonua o Hōnaunau National Historical Park, and Green Sand Beach.
  • Public Transit: Kona does have a public bus system, but it’s not the most convenient for tourists. Routes are limited, and buses don’t always run frequently. It’s fine for short trips around town but not ideal for reaching the island’s best spots.
  • Rideshares: Uber and Lyft do exist in Kona, but they’re not as widely available as in bigger cities. They work well for short trips (like getting to/from the airport or a night out in town), but if you’re heading to more remote beaches, doing scenic drives, or exploring national parks, you’ll probably save money (and hassle) by renting a car.
  • Island Hopping & Cruises: If you’re visiting from another Hawaiian island, inter-island flights are quick and easy, with Hawaiian Airlines and Southwest offering frequent service. Also, some major cruise lines stop in Kona on longer Hawaii itineraries, giving visitors a day to explore before sailing on.

When to Visit Kona (Weather & Crowds)

Kona enjoys some of the best weather in Hawaii, thanks to the Kohala Mountains blocking much of the rainfall from the northeast trade winds. This means plenty of sunshine, warm temps in the 80s F year-round, and only about 20 rainy days per year – my dream! But while the weather is pretty consistent, the crowds, prices, and wildlife experiences change depending on when you visit. 

Here’s a breakdown of what to expect in each season:

Winter (December – March): Peak Season & Whale Watching

Winter is one of the busiest times in Kona, with visitors escaping the cold from the mainland. Expect higher prices on flights and hotels, especially around the holidays, and more people at popular beaches and attractions. 

But there’s another reason this season is so popular – it’s humpback whale season! Over 8,000 whales migrate to Hawaii’s warm waters, and Kona is one of the best places to see them. If whale-watching tours or spotting these gentle giants from the shore sound like your thing, winter is an epic time to visit. 

Spring (April – June): Fewer Crowds, Perfect Weather

Spring is a sweet spot for visiting Kona. The holiday rush is over, spring break crowds taper off by mid-April, and prices start to dip. The weather? Still sunny and warm, with little rain. Plus, you might still catch the tail end of whale season if you visit in early April. This is a great time to visit if you want all the sunshine with fewer people.

Summer (July – Early September): Hot & Bustling

Summer brings warmer temps, slightly more humidity, and an influx of families since schools are out. Crowds are up, but it’s still nowhere near as packed as Oahu or Maui in the summer. 

If you love snorkeling and diving, this is one of the best times for crystal-clear water – waves are calmer, making for incredible underwater visibility. Just book your accommodations early, as prices can rise during peak summer travel.

Fall (Mid-September – November): Best for Tranquility & Deals

If you’re looking for smaller crowds, lower prices, and still-perfect weather, fall is the time to visit Kona. We visited in late September and couldn’t have asked for a better experience – warm, sunny days with minimal rain, and far fewer tourists than we expected. 

Where to Stay in Kona

Kona has a little bit of everything when it comes to accommodations – from oceanfront resorts to budget-friendly hotels and even unique vacation rentals. But where you stay depends on what kind of experience you’re looking for of course. 

Do you want to be right in the heart of Kailua-Kona, close to restaurants and shops? Prefer a laid-back beachfront resort with easy access to the ocean? Or maybe you’re after a secluded retreat surrounded by lush nature? 

Let’s break it down:

Best Areas to Stay in Kona

  • Kailua-Kona (Downtown Kona) – Perfect if you wanna be within walking distance of restaurants, bars, and shops (like us!). You’ll find mid-range hotels, budget inns, and oceanfront condos here. This is where most of the action happens, so it’s ideal if you want a lively atmosphere. 
  • Keauhou – Located just south of Kailua-Kona, this area is home to upscale resorts, golf courses, and the famous manta ray night dives. It’s a great choice for relaxation with easy access to the main town.
  • Hualālai / Four Seasons Area – If you’re going all out, this is where you’ll find luxury resorts with private beaches, top-tier dining, and spa experiences. The Four Seasons Hualālai is arguably the best resort in Kona (and comes with a hefty price tag).
  • South Kona / Captain Cook – More of a quiet, local vibe with lush landscapes and coffee farms. Great if you want to be near Pu’uhonua o Honaunau National Historical Park and Kealakekua Bay. Accommodations here are mostly vacation rentals and small inns.

Best Hotels & Resorts in Kona

Luxury Stays:

  • Four Seasons Resort Hualālai – The ultimate high-end experience with oceanfront bungalows, infinity pools, and a private beach. $$$$$
  • Holualoa Inn – A stunning boutique bed & breakfast tucked in the hills above Kona, with incredible ocean views. Peaceful and perfect for couples. $$$$

Mid-Range Resorts & Hotels:

  • Outrigger Kona Resort & Spa – Located in Keauhou, this resort has gorgeous ocean views, a huge pool, and is famous for its manta ray viewing deck. $$$
  • Royal Kona Resort – Right on the waterfront in downtown Kona, this hotel has an unbeatable location and ocean-facing rooms. The onsite tiki bar is a fun bonus. $$-$$$

Budget-Friendly & Vacation Rentals:

  • Kona Tiki Hotel – A small, no-frills oceanfront hotel with a retro Hawaiian vibe. Super affordable, but books up fast! $$
  • Vacation Rentals & Airbnbs – Kona has tons of beachfront condos, coffee farm stays, and private houses. Look in Kailua-Kona for convenience, or South Kona for a quieter stay. Prices vary depending on location and amenities.

Where We Stayed in Kona

Since we only booked 2 weeks out (it was a last minute decision to head to Kona), we stayed in a cozy airbnb right in downtown Kailua-Kona – perfect for gorgeous sunset views and easy access to everything in town. 

If you’re only spending 3 days in Kona, I highly recommend staying somewhere central so you can maximize your time. But if you’re planning a longer, more relaxing trip, a resort in Keauhou or a rental in South Kona might be a better fit.

TL;DR? If you want walkability, stay in downtown Kona. If you want a resort vibe, head to Keauhou. If you’re splurging, book the Four Seasons.

Kona vs. Hilo: Which Side of the Big Island is Right for You?

Choosing between Kona and Hilo? It all depends on what kind of experience you’re after. While both are on the Big Island, they couldn’t feel more different – from the weather to the landscapes to the activities available. A little cheat sheet:

  • Kona (West Side) = Sunshine, beaches, snorkeling, and great food
  • Hilo (East Side) = Rainforests, waterfalls, volcanoes, and a more local feel

Why Choose Kona?

If you’re dreaming of white sand beaches, crystal-clear water, epic snorkeling, and sunny days, Kona is the spot for you. The west side of the island is dry and warm year-round, making it ideal for beach hopping, exploring lava rock coastlines, and indulging in some of the best food and coffee Hawaii has to offer. Kona is also where you’ll find resorts, lively nightlife, and world-famous snorkeling and diving (hello, manta rays!).

Best for: Sun lovers, beach bums, coffee enthusiasts, and those who want a mix of adventure and relaxation.

Why Choose Hilo?

On the flip side, Hilo is lush, green, and tropical – think towering waterfalls, dense rainforests, and a more laid-back, local vibe. It gets way more rain than Kona, but that’s what makes it so vibrant. 

If you want to chase waterfalls, go ziplining, or explore Hawaii Volcanoes National Park, Hilo is your best bet. Just don’t expect many sandy beaches – the coastline here is more rugged, with dramatic cliffs and black sand beaches.

Best for: Nature lovers, adventure seekers, and those who don’t mind a little (or a lot of) rain.

So, Which One Should You Pick?

If you have limited time on the Big Island, Kona is the easier and more tourist-friendly choice. But if you want to see the island’s wilder, more tropical side, Hilo is worth a visit. 

Better yet? Do both! It’s about a 2.5 to 3-hour drive between the two, so you can easily split your time between the sunny beaches of Kona and the waterfalls of Hilo if you’ve got enough time. 

Are 3 Days in Kona Enough?

Absolutely – 3 days in Kona is plenty of time to soak up the sun, snorkel with manta rays, sip world-famous coffee, and explore the stunning coastline. But if you’re thinking about squeezing in a day trip to Hilo or Hawai’i Volcanoes National Park, you might want to reconsider.

Sure, some people say it’s doable, but here’s the thing: Hilo is over two hours away, and the national park deserves at least a full day to truly experience the lava fields, craters, and epic landscapes. Plus, the weather on the east side is notoriously unpredictable – it rains over 200 days a year, meaning you’ll have zero wiggle room if the weather decides not to cooperate.

If you have extra time (and don’t mind packing up and staying on the other side of the island for a night), then yes, a visit to Hilo and Volcanoes National Park makes sense – especially if you’re into hiking, waterfalls, and volcanoes. But with just three days? Stick to Kona and the west coast. More sunshine, less driving, and way more time to actually enjoy paradise.

Psst – desperately wanna visit the other side of the island from Kona? Best to book a tour like this full day Volcanoes, Waterfalls, & Coffee Farm Day Trip. It includes hotel pick up and drop off, and all the best attractions – Hawaii Volcanoes National Park, Kona Coffee Farm, Waipio Valley Lookout, Akaka and Rainbow Waterfalls, and Punalu’u Black Sand Beach. Literally the perfect tour if you’ve only got one day to dedicate to the east side of the island.

Of course if you’re coming from further than San Francisco, I obviously wouldn’t recommend coming all the way to Hawaii for only a mere 3 days, haha. But 3 days in Kona and nearby is the perfect addition to a longer Hawaiian itinerary. Especially if you’re planning to go to Volcanoes National Park near Hilo. 

What to Pack for Kona 

When packing for your trip, you wanna make sure you’ve got all the right clothing and gear for everything you’ve planned for your Kona itinerary. Think about the activities you’ll be doing, and prepare for those! 

Everyone will need their typical everyday clothing (shorts, t-shirts, tank tops, etc). A few pairs of shoes is a good idea – I recommend bringing a pair of flip flops, sandals, dressy shoes (for a nice dinner out), and sneakers/hiking boots if you’re planning on walking across lava fields (like to Makalawena Beach). I also recommend packing a light jacket or sweater, yes, even for Hawaii! Evenings can be breezy, and it gets chilly during manta ray snorkeling.

Women’s Packing List: You’ll obviously need all your favorite beach attire, including bathing suits (buy a few new ones!), beach cover-ups, loose cotton dresses, a cute sun hat, casual and dressy sandals.

Men’s Packing List: Be cool and casual during the day (my husband loves short sleeve button downs for a more polished look), but be sure to check the dress code for any restaurants you really wanna go to. Men might need pants and dress shoes to enter.

Other Miscellaneous Items to Pack for Your Kona Itinerary

  • Polarized sunglasses (better for blocking out the harsh UV rays)
  • Beach bag and/or backpack: make sure it’s large enough to fit a beach towel or two!
  • Hat/s: The sun is strong here! I love taking a wide-brimmed sun hat for the beach and a fun trucker hat when hiking.
  • Rash guard: Keeps you protected from the sun and adds warmth for night snorkeling with manta rays (although your tour will likely provide you with one).
  • If your Kona itinerary includes a bunch of snorkeling around the island (like at Two Step), you’ll probably save some cash by bringing your own mask and snorkel.
  • A waterproof kindle or other e-reader for reading at the beach (I’d be worried a physical book may accidentally get wet!)
  • Your hotel may give you towels, but we love traveling with a sand-free beach mat
  • Reusable water bottle: better for the environment and a must for hiking!
  • Reef Safe sunscreen (always use when in the water, as other sunscreen is harmful to marine life): We love ThinkSport (make sure the bottles are less than 3.4 ounces if you’re bringing them in your carryon)! Don’t forget about SPF lip balm as well!
  • Aloe Vera Gel: always have some handy in case you get a sunburn; aloe will give the burn some much-needed relief
  • Dramamine: This will help with motion sickness if you’re planning to do a snorkeling or boat tour (the waves can get rough!).
  • Underwater camera: All my underwater photography tips and gear here. I’d check out an underwater phone case, too.
  • Portable battery charger: Charge your phone on the go and never run out of a charge
  • Noise-cancelling headphones: Great for both the plane and the beach! I’m obsessed with my AirPods and Noah loves his Bose Quiet Comforts.
  • Tote bag: Plastic bags are banned in Hawaii, so bring your own for shopping! I love this collapsible reusable tote bag (hardly takes up any room in your suitcase).

Additional Kona Itinerary Facts

Language

Hawaii’s official languages are English and Hawaiian, though you’ll mostly hear English spoken throughout Kona. You’ll also notice Hawaiian words and phrases used regularly – like “aloha” (hello/goodbye/love), “mahalo” (thank you), and “ohana” (family). 

Street names, towns, and attractions often have Hawaiian names, so it’s helpful to get familiar with the pronunciation (Kailua-Kona, Puʻuhonua o Hōnaunau, Mauna Kea – lots of vowels, I know!).

Culture of Kona 

Kona has a more rugged, down-to-earth vibe compared to the polished resorts of Maui or the urban energy of Honolulu. It feels lived-in – where everyday island life blends with tourism. You’ll see pickup trucks parked outside local poke spots, small mom-and-pop shops alongside beachfront bars, and a mix of both visitors and locals enjoying the coastline. 

While there’s luxury resorts north of town, much of Kona feels refreshingly unpolished, with a strong connection to its Hawaiian roots. It’s a place where culture, history, and real life coexist, making it feel more authentic than overly touristy.

I do want to touch upon the fact that we saw plenty of unhoused individuals in town. Like any big city, Kona has its fair share of issues. Life in Hawaii gets ridiculously over-romanticized, but in reality it’s quite difficult to survive. I’ve heard that other states send homeless people to Hawaii to get them off their soil, but I’m not sure how true this is. 

What to Eat in Kona (Must-Try Hawaiian Foods!)

Hawaii’s food scene is next-level, and Kona is no exception. Some must-eats while you’re here:

  • Fresh Poke: Ultra-fresh, marinated raw fish, typically served over rice. Try it at Da Poke Shack (our favorite poke by far) or Umekes.
  • Loco Moco: A hearty plate of rice topped with a hamburger patty, fried egg, and rich brown gravy. Classic Hawaiian comfort food!
  • Kona Coffee: Some of the best coffee in the world is grown right here. Visit a coffee farm and go on a tour or grab a cup at Kona Coffee & Tea.
  • Shave Ice: Not just any shaved ice – Hawaiian shave ice is ultra-fine, melt-in-your-mouth goodness. Try it with tropical flavors like lilikoi (passionfruit) and li hing mui (salty dried plum).
  • Huli Huli Chicken: Juicy, smoky, and packed with flavor! This Hawaiian-style BBQ chicken is a must. Try it at a roadside stand for the real deal.
  • Macadamia Nut Everything: From pancakes to cookies to chocolate-covered mac nuts, you’ll find these everywhere (and they make great souvenirs!).

Brief History of Kona 

Kona’s history runs deep, from ancient Hawaiian settlements to its role in the arrival of Western explorers. This sunny stretch of coastline was once home to Hawaiian royalty, including King Kamehameha I, who spent his later years in Kailua-Kona. The area was also where the first Christian missionaries arrived in the 19th century, forever shaping the cultural landscape. 

Today, remnants of Kona’s past can still be seen in sacred sites, historic heiau (Hawaiian temples), and the influence of coffee farming – an industry that dates back to the early 1800s when Kona’s volcanic soil proved perfect for growing some of the world’s best beans. 

Other Kona Travel Tips

  • Sun Protection is a MUST: Kona gets a lot of sun, so pack reef-safe sunscreen, sunglasses, and a hat.
  • Renting a Car is Best: Public transportation is limited, and many of the best spots (like Kua Bay and coffee farms) require a drive.
  • Island Time is Real: Life moves a little slower here, so relax, enjoy, and don’t expect everything to be rushed or overly punctual.
  • Respect the ‘Āina (Land): Hawaii is stunning, and locals take great pride in preserving its beauty. Be mindful of cultural sites, don’t touch sea turtles or coral reefs, and leave no trace when exploring.
  • Tipping is Expected: Just like on the mainland, tipping is customary in restaurants, for tours, and even at coffee shops.

Local Etiquette & Sustainability in Kona

Respect for the land (‘āina) and local culture is a big deal in Hawaii, and Kona is no exception. Here are a few things to keep in mind:

  • Aloha Spirit: Hawaiians are known for their warmth and hospitality, but respect goes both ways. A simple aloha (hello/goodbye) or mahalo (thank you) goes a long way!
  • Respect Sacred Sites: Places like Puʻuhonua o Hōnaunau and historic heiau (temples) are deeply significant. Don’t climb on ruins, take rocks or sand, or leave trash behind.
  • Reef-Safe Sunscreen: Hawaii has banned sunscreens with harmful chemicals like oxybenzone and octinoxate to protect its coral reefs. Stick to mineral-based sunscreens.
  • Wildlife Etiquette: It’s tempting to get close to sea turtles and manta rays, but Hawaiian law requires you to keep your distance – at least 10 feet from turtles and 50 yards from dolphins. Look, don’t touch!
  • Reduce Plastic Use: Bring a reusable water bottle and shopping bag, as Hawaii has strict plastic regulations.
  • Support Local: From Kona coffee farms to family-owned eateries, spending your dollars at locally run businesses helps keep the community thriving. Skip the L&L Hawaiian BBQ…

A little mindfulness goes a long way in preserving the beauty and culture of Kona for generations to come!

Now that you’re armed with these extra travel tips, let’s dive into the ultimate 3 days in Kona itinerary!

3 Day Kona Itinerary 

Day 1: Downtown Kona and Nearby

Kick off your Kona adventure with a full day in town – good food, beach time, and a once-in-a-lifetime experience snorkeling with manta rays at night.

Stop 1: Coffee and Breakfast

Start the day Hawaiian-style – with coffee and malasadas (Portuguese donuts)! And nope, calories don’t count on vacation! 

There’s a few spots nearby, but we LOVED Paradise Bakery Hawaii. Just make sure to come early because there’s usually a line out the door and they do sell out, sometimes quite early! There’s lots of filled malasadas to choose from, including guava, ube, chocolate, lilikoi, and strawberry. The perfect pillowy texture!

If you’re still hungry (second breakfast anyone?!), grab an acai bowl at Basik Acai (seriously, so good and light and refreshing). 

And don’t miss some Kona coffee! Head to HiCO – Hawaiian Coffee for a cup of smooth, rich Kona coffee or stop by Ka’u Coffee Mill Café to try another variety of Hawaii’s world-famous brews.

Stop 2: Downtown Kona

Once you’re fueled up, take a leisurely stroll through downtown Kona. Browse the Kona Farmers Market, visit the historic Hulihe’e Palace, and stop by Kailua Pier for some classic waterfront views. 

Right next to the pier, you’ll find Kamakahonu Beach – a tiny but scenic stretch of sand perfect for a quick dip. 

Before leaving downtown, don’t forget to grab a shave ice from Gecko Girlz or Scandinavian Shave Ice – because let’s be real, you can’t come to Hawaii and not indulge in some shave ice! We love getting some condensed milk on top for extra creaminess!

Stop 3: Fresh Poke for Lunch

Once you get hungry, head on over to Da Poke Shack – this was some of the best poke we’ve ever had in Hawaii, and we’ve eaten a lot of poke across the islands. Fresh, flavorful, and perfectly seasoned. If poke isn’t your thing (first of all, why?!), Shaka Tacoz is a great alternative, serving up tacos with an island twist.

Stop 4: Magic Sands Beach Park

Finally some lazy beach time! I recommend heading to Magic Sands Beach Park, which we LOVED so much we actually went twice during our 3 days in Kona. It’s got soft white sand, bright blue water, and waves that are so fun (always be careful in the ocean, waves can sneak up on you).

The beach is perfect for sunbathing (and people watching) too. I could’ve stayed in the water for HOURS (basking in the Hawaiian sun is my fave thing ever), but lunch was calling!

Stop 5: Dinner at Aloha Vibes

After a day in the sun, wind down with dinner at Aloha Vibes, a spot we fell in love with for its live music and absolutely delicious coconut shrimp dish. I was too eager to eat my food that I didn’t even take a picture (which is SUPER unlike me, haha).

And the best part? Oneo Bay is right nearby, making it the perfect place to catch a killer sunset!

Stop 6: Snorkeling with Manta Rays

But the night isn’t over yet – because it’s time for one of the coolest, most surreal experiences on this Kona itinerary: snorkeling with manta rays in the dark! This is probably the most popular excursion on the Big Island, so promise me you won’t miss it and make sure to book in advance, especially during peak season!

There’s plenty of manta ray snorkeling tours, but I highly recommend THIS ONE. It’s the exact one we booked, and I felt super safe with them during the entire experience (plus they gave out tons of snacks, haha). Just make sure to book the snorkeling add-on so you can actually get in the water with them of course.

Even if you’re not a strong swimmer, don’t worry. You literally hold onto the side of a makeshift raft and dangle your legs over a pool noodle! Hard to explain, but you’ll see what I mean. 

We got insanely lucky on our tour and saw over two dozen manta rays (apparently, the normal is just a handful?!). At first, it was kinda nerve-wracking since they got super close (they even touched us on occasion!), but after the initial adrenaline rush, it was pure magic watching these massive creatures glide effortlessly through the water. My videos are absolutely INSANE – they really put on a show for us!

Heads up: It gets pretty chilly out there since it’s pitch black and there’s no sun, but our tour provider provided a wetsuit top (not sure what it’s actually called, but it helped!) to keep warm. Totally worth it for an experience this exhilarating!

Day 2: North of Kona – Stunning Beaches, Turtles, & Sunset Drinks

Day 2 is all about exploring the breathtaking beaches north of Kona, indulging in fresh island flavors, and soaking in one seriously memorable sunset. It’s probably my favorite day on this Kona itinerary!

Stop 1: Breakfast in Downtown Koan

Kick off the day with a hearty breakfast at Fish Hopper Kona (oceanfront views + incredible omelets) or 808 Grindz Café (super affordable, and their macadamia nut pancakes are chef’s kiss).

Stop 2: Beach Hopping

Once you’re all fueled up (and slathered on the sunscreen), it’s time to hit the beaches! And trust me, these are some of the best on the island:

  • Kua Bay (Manini‘owali Beach): One of our favorite beaches in all of Hawaii! And that’s saying a lot since we’ve been to dozens! There’s nothing better than soft white sand and crystal-clear water! While parking can be a little tricky (the lot is teeny tiny so practically everyone parks on the street), it’s absolutely worth it. Since we found a spot about a 10 minute walk away, we had to lug our stuff (beach chairs and such), so be mindful of what you’re bringing and don’t forget anything in your car!
  • Makalawena Beach: If you’re up for a little adventure, this one’s for you. Getting here requires a hike through a lava field (yes, a lava field!), but the reward? A remote, stunning beach with powdery white sand and way fewer crowds. Pack plenty of water and good shoes for the walk!

Stop 3: Lunch at Lava Lava Beach Club

For lunch, grab a table at Lava Lava Beach Club – this place is right on the sand, with a laid-back island vibe and killer mai tais. Try the coconut shrimp or the fresh catch of the day! After eating, take a leisurely walk down ‘Anaeho‘omalu Beach, which is just steps away.

Stop 4: Shopping and Shave Ice

Next, take a break from the sun (your skin will thank you) and stroll through the Kings’ Shops at Waikoloa Village. It’s a small but cute shopping area, perfect for picking up souvenirs, checking out local boutiques, or just wandering around for a bit. It’s way more upscale than downtown Kona, and feels a world away. 

And, of course, no Hawaiian afternoon is complete without shave ice! Stop by Original Big Island Shave Ice Co. for a sweet and refreshing treat. The line will probably be out the door, but there’s nothing better than some shave ice on a hot day. 

Stop 5: Turtles and Volcanic Lava 

For the best way to wrap up the day, head to Kaloko-Honokōhau National Historical Park, just north of the airport. We absolutely loved this spot – it’s not only a beautiful coastal area with ancient Hawaiian fishponds and petroglyphs and mile-high palm trees, but there’s SEA TURTLES! And oh so many of them! Please view them from a distance and NEVER feed, chase, or even think about touching them.

Psst – enter and park via the marina side if you don’t wanna walk a mile to the ocean. Google Maps takes you to the actual entrance of the park, which is quite far from the beach. There is the Petroglyph Boardwalk Trail if it’s not too hot and you wanna get some steps though! Follow directions to aptly named “Sea Turtle Beach” and you’ll only have a 5 minute walk to the shore.

Stop 6: Sunset Drinks and Dinner at a Luxe Resort

As the sun starts to set, treat yourself to a fancy dinner and some drinks at the Fairmont Orchid (one of the most beautiful resorts on the island). For an extra-special splurge, book a table at Brown’s Beach House or CanoeHouse – both are upscale, oceanfront, and absolutely worth it if you’re looking for a memorable dining experience. A cocktail at sunset with waves crashing in the background? Yes, please.

Day 3: South of Kona – History, Snorkeling, & Coffee Farms

The final day on this Kona itinerary takes you south to Captain Cook, where you’ll find ancient Hawaiian history, some of the best snorkeling on the island, and world-famous Kona coffee farms.

Stop 1: Hawaiian History at Puʻuhonua o Hōnaunau

Start the day at Puʻuhonua o Hōnaunau National Historical Park, a sacred site that once served as a place of refuge for ancient Hawaiians. It’s a beautiful, peaceful spot with reconstructed temples, wooden carvings, and lava rock pathways. Spend some time wandering through the park and learning about Hawaiian history before heading to your next stop – one of the best snorkeling spots on the island.

Stop 2: Snorkeling at Two Step or Catamaran Cruise

No Kona itinerary is complete without some snorkeling! Right next door, you’ll find Two Step Beach, famous for its crystal-clear water and thriving coral reefs. We made the rookie mistake of assuming we could rent snorkel gear nearby – nope! Bring your own gear because there’s nowhere close to rent or buy it. Once you’re in the water, though, you’ll be surrounded by colorful fish, and if you’re lucky, you might even spot some dolphins or sea turtles!

Not sure how to snorkel? I recommend taking a snorkeling cruise instead. The staff will walk you through everything step-by-step and make sure you feel comfortable in the water. Of course with scenic views of the Kona coast and tropical fruit included! This guided catamaran snorkeling tour goes from Keauhou Bay to Captain Cook’s Monument, with multiple snorkel spots included. You may even spot whales and/or dolphins if you’re lucky (my favorite!).

OR take an underwater submarine adventure if you don’t wanna get wet or feel nervous snorkeling. When was the last time you’ve been in a submarine?!

Stop 3: Local Lunch at Kaaloa’s Super J’s

After all that swimming, you’ll be starving, and Ka’aloa’s Super J’s is the perfect place to refuel. It’s a no-frills, straightforward family-run spot known for their authentic Hawaiian plate lunches. Their laulau (pork wrapped in taro leaves) is legendary (probably the best on the island), and you’ll be eating alongside locals, which is always a good sign.

We shared a few things and LOVED IT! Plus, the lady serving us was so helpful since we had no idea what to get. Don’t miss the sweet potato haupia pie if they’ve got it!

Stop 4: Coffee Farm Tour

Next, you can’t come to Kona and not visit a coffee farm – this is where some of the best coffee in the world is grown! I’m sure you’ve heard of Kona coffee! There’s plenty of farms to choose from, but Hala Tree Coffee and Heavenly Hawaiian Kona Coffee Farm Tours both offer great tastings and gorgeous views. Learn about the growing and roasting process, sip on some fresh brews, and maybe even bring a bag (or three) home.

We decided to make a quick stop at Hala Tree Coffee, and loved that they gave out as many free samples as we wanted!

Stop 5: Extras

If you’re up for a little extra relaxation, consider booking some time at Mamalahoa Hot Tubs, a hidden gem where you can soak in warm, private outdoor tubs surrounded by lush greenery.

On your way back toward Kona, take a quick peek at Keauhou Bay, a calm and scenic bay with cultural significance – it’s where King Kamehameha III was born!

And if you’re like me and just can’t get enough of Magic Sands Beach, this is the perfect time to go back. We loved it so much we went twice during our 3 days in Kona – the soft sand, crashing waves, and golden sunset just hit differently. And more sea turtles! Plus, it’s super close to downtown Kona, making it the perfect last stop before your Hawaiian luau!

Stop 6: Traditional Hawaiian Luau Dinner

Finally, if you’ve never been to a Hawaiian luau before, add one to your Kona itinerary! It’s the perfect place to experience one – and trust me, it’s so much more than just dinner and a show. Think: traditional Hawaiian music, colorful hula dancing, and a jaw-dropping Samoan fire knife performance, all under the stars right on the shores of Kailua Bay. The energy is electric, the setting is magical, and the Mai Tais? Let’s just say you won’t be going thirsty. 

The all-you-can-eat buffet is packed with local favorites – everything from kalua-style pork and freshly caught fish to coconut rolls, teriyaki beef, and even Waipio Valley poi. Don’t skip the sweet potato-mac salad or the haupia pudding for dessert. It’s a full-on feast of island flavors, and the whole night feels like one big celebration of Polynesian culture. If you’re in Kona for a few nights, definitely carve out an evening for this – it’s one of those unforgettable “only in Hawaii” experiences. Book your Hawaiian luau here (and yes, they do get booked up!).

So there ya have it – my perfect 3 days in Kona itinerary! Are you headed to the islands soon?!



The post The Best Kona Itinerary: 3 Days in Kona, Hawaii appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/kona-itinerary-big-island-hawaii/feed/ 0
3 Days in the Peruvian Amazon Rainforest (Puerto Maldonado) https://apassionandapassport.com/amazon-rainforest-peru-puerto-maldonado/ https://apassionandapassport.com/amazon-rainforest-peru-puerto-maldonado/#respond Fri, 14 Mar 2025 05:49:34 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=32138 Heading to Peru and dreaming of an adventure in the Peruvian Amazon?! You’re in for an unforgettable trip! I’m covering everything you need to know – where to go, what to see, how to get there, and plenty of insider tips to make the most of your jungle adventure in Puerto Maldonado! Misty mornings onContinue Reading

The post 3 Days in the Peruvian Amazon Rainforest (Puerto Maldonado) appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Heading to Peru and dreaming of an adventure in the Peruvian Amazon?! You’re in for an unforgettable trip! I’m covering everything you need to know – where to go, what to see, how to get there, and plenty of insider tips to make the most of your jungle adventure in Puerto Maldonado!

Misty mornings on the Tambopata River. Scarlet macaws swooping over clay licks. Towering kapok trees tangled in vines, hiding sloths and jaguars. CAPYBARAS (!!!) splashing through oxbow lakes, while caimans lurk in the shallows. Welcome to the Peruvian Amazon – wild, untamed, and teeming with life at every turn.

I’ve had the Amazon on my bucket list since the moment I even knew what a bucket list was. So when I started planning my 3-week Peru trip, there was no way I was skipping it. Puerto Maldonado (the capital city of the Madre de Dios region in southeast Peru) checked all the boxes. It’s relatively easy to get to, not overrun with tourists, and a solid bang for my buck. So off I went, ready to dive into the wild.

The Amazon Rainforest is a living, breathing powerhouse – pumping out 20% of the world’s oxygen and holding a staggering 20% of the planet’s river water. With an astonishing 40,000 plant species and a mind-blowing 2.5 million insect species, it’s one of the most biodiverse places on Earth. There’s simply nowhere else like it.

The jungle town of Puerto Maldonado is the ultimate gateway to the southern Amazon. Think endless rainforest, insane biodiversity, and some of the most wildlife-packed lakes around. I watched capybaras lounging by the water, white caimans and their babies gliding through the shallows, and flocks of colorful birds filling the sky. If you’re looking for a true Amazon experience, this is the place to be!

Psst – I visited the Amazon Rainforest in Peru at the end of a 3-week G Adventures Tour, and can’t recommend them enough. If you’re traveling to Peru on your own and want to visit the Amazon without any hassle, this 4-day Puerto Maldonado tour got excellent reviews and is great value! Can’t handle the humidity and would rather have a shorter stay like I did? Check out this 3-day tour instead! And definitely consider this one that goes to the macaw clay lick

That last one is the one I would have picked if my Amazon experience wasn’t already included in my longer 3-week Peru tour. All include transportation, meals, lodging, and a guide who will take you on daily wildlife excursions!

Is the Amazon a Jungle or Rainforest?

I was a little confused about this at first, so lemme clarify in case you’re unsure also. Yes, I know it’s called the Amazon Rainforest, but I kept calling it a jungle! 

So let’s set the record straight: The Amazon is a rainforest, and it’s actually the largest tropical rainforest in the world. However, the terms jungle and rainforest are sometimes used interchangeably, even though they’re not exactly the same.

  • A rainforest is a dense, tropical forest with high rainfall (at least 79 inches per year) and incredible biodiversity. The Amazon fits this definition perfectly.
  • A jungle is a type of dense forest, typically with thick undergrowth, making it harder to navigate. While parts of the Amazon do have jungle-like areas, much of the rainforest has a tall canopy with less undergrowth on the forest floor.

Where is the Peruvian Amazon Rainforest?

Before visiting and doing research, I had no idea just how massive the Peruvian Amazon really was. Covering 782,880 square kilometers (302,000 square miles) – about twice the size of Germany or the combined size of Texas and California – it actually makes up 60% of Peru’s total land area. Which is INSANE to me considering I spent almost 3 weeks exploring other parts of Peru.

Yet, despite its size, it remains one of the least populated regions, with vast stretches of untouched rainforest teeming with wildlife. As part of the larger Amazon Rainforest, which spans multiple South American countries (nine to be exact!), Peru’s section stands out as one of the most biodiverse places on Earth. 

If you’re looking to explore the Amazon in Peru, there are a few different areas, which I’ll explain in detail below.

Puerto Maldonado

Puerto Maldonado is one of the most accessible and popular gateways to the Peruvian Amazon – perfect for travelers who want to experience the jungle without an overly complicated journey (like me!). 

It sits in the southeastern part of the country, only 55 kilometers (34 miles) from the Bolivian border, right where the Tambopata and Madre de Dios rivers meet. Since it has an airport and decent infrastructure, it’s an easy place to start an Amazon adventure while still feeling completely immersed in nature.  

Psst – Puerto Maldonado itself isn’t exactly the rainforest experience you’re imagining; it’s actually a bustling little town! To truly immerse yourself in the Amazon, you’ll need to venture beyond the city limits. Most lodges require a journey by car and then a longboat ride along winding rivers to reach the heart of the jungle. This is where I went and where all my photos are from!

Iquitos

On the other hand, Iquitos is deep in the northern Amazon and is the largest city in the world that can’t be reached by road – only by plane or boat. It’s the place to go for a true off-the-grid experience, with river cruises, remote lodges, and even pink river dolphins in the waters of the Amazon River itself. It’s more developed than Puerto Maldonado but also more difficult to reach.  

Manú National Park

You’ll also see tours for Manú National Park advertised all over Cusco. Manú is one of the most protected parts of the Peruvian Amazon, meaning fewer tourists, but also trickier logistics. Getting there requires a long, bumpy journey by road and river, making it best for those who want a more rugged, off-the-beaten-path experience.  

Since we visited Puerto Maldonado, that’s what this Peruvian Amazon blog post will focus on! It’s an incredible place to experience the jungle’s wild beauty, packed with diverse wildlife, stunning lakes, and a mix of adventure and relaxation.

Wildlife in Puerto Maldonado vs. Other Parts of the Amazon  

While the entire Amazon Rainforest is a biodiversity hotspot, different regions have unique ecosystems, meaning the wildlife you’ll encounter can vary. Puerto Maldonado, located in the southern Amazon, is home to an incredible range of species, particularly in the Tambopata National Reserve. 

Here, you’ll find red howler monkeys, capuchins, squirrel monkeys, dusky titi monkeys, and the occasional spider monkey. The riverbanks are prime spots for white caimans, capybaras (the world’s largest rodent), and plenty of birdlife, including horned screamers, herons, and vibrant macaws. This region is also famous for its oxbow lakes, where you might see giant river otters (though they’re rare) and side-necked turtles basking in the sun.  

Other parts of the Amazon offer different wildlife experiences. In Iquitos, in the northern Peruvian Amazon, you’re more likely to see pink river dolphins swimming in the murky waters of the Amazon River. This region also has higher humidity and more seasonal flooding, which creates a different ecosystem where sloths, anacondas, and tree-dwelling species thrive. The forests here tend to be denser and wetter, making wildlife spotting a bit trickier but rewarding.  

In the Brazilian Amazon, near Manaus, the sheer scale of the rainforest means a greater chance of encountering jaguars, piranhas, and even harpy eagles. This part of the Amazon is also home to the massive Victoria Amazonica water lilies and unique flooded forest ecosystems.  

So, if you’re visiting Puerto Maldonado, expect an incredible mix of monkeys, macaws, capybaras, and caimans, with the possibility of spotting elusive creatures like sloths and river otters. But if your dream is to see pink dolphins or anacondas, you might want to venture further north into the deeper Amazon.

But set your expectations accordingly – this is the rainforest, and wildlife is, well, wild! While you’re guaranteed to see plenty of incredible creatures, there’s no way to predict exactly what will cross your path. If you’re dreaming of spotting a jaguar or an anaconda, just know that sightings are extremely rare. 

Our guides, who have worked in the jungle for years, told us they’ve only seen them a handful of times. Since you’ll only be there for a few days, the odds aren’t in your favor – but trust me, the Amazon has plenty of other incredible wildlife to keep you in awe!

When to Visit the Peruvian Amazon

Choosing when to visit the Peruvian Amazon can make or break your experience, depending on what you’re looking for. No matter when you go, expect hot and humid conditions year-round — it’s the rainforest, after all! But the level of rain, river conditions, and even wildlife sightings can change drastically depending on the season.

Dry Season (April to October) – Best for Clear Skies & Easier Exploration

We visited in early August, and the conditions were absolutely perfect – plenty of sunshine, lower humidity (relatively speaking), and fewer mosquitos than in the wetter months. 

This is the best time to visit if you want:

  • Easier hiking: Trails are drier and less muddy.
  • More wildlife sightings: Animals tend to stick closer to the riverbanks since there’s less standing water deep in the jungle.
  • Better boat travel: Water levels are lower, meaning fewer obstacles and smoother rides.
  • Clearer skies for stargazing: With less cloud cover, the Amazon night sky is unreal! Including the Milky Way!

While it’s the “dry” season, don’t expect zero rain – this is still the rainforest, and short but intense showers can happen anytime. But in general, they’re less frequent and don’t disrupt activities as much as in the wet season.

Wet Season (November to March/April) – Lush Scenery & Higher Water Levels

If you visit during the rainy season, prepare for daily downpours and extremely high humidity. February tends to be the rainiest month, and heavy storms can lead to flooded trails, rescheduled activities, or even cancellations if water levels get too high. Thankfully, most lodges supply trekking boots when the hiking is exceptionally muddy. 

However, visiting in this season does have some unique perks:

  • The jungle is at its lushest and greenest: Everything feels extra alive!
  • Rivers are much higher: Meaning boat access is better, and you can venture deeper into areas that are harder to reach in the dry season.
  • Some wildlife is easier to spot: Aquatic species, in particular, thrive in the flooded forest.

One big thing to note – rainfall varies from year to year, especially due to El Niño, which affects the entire climate of Peru. Some years see much heavier or lighter rains than usual, so it’s always good to check recent conditions before booking.

So, when’s the best time to go? If you want ideal weather, better hiking conditions, and fewer trip disruptions, the dry season (April to October) is your best bet. But if you’re after lush jungle scenery and higher water levels for boat access, the wet season (November to March/April) might be worth considering – just be prepared for rain, and lots of it!

How to Get to Puerto Maldonado

Getting to Puerto Maldonado is an adventure in itself! While it’s deep in the Amazon, it’s surprisingly accessible compared to other jungle destinations in Peru. Here’s exactly how to get there:

Step 1: Fly to Puerto Maldonado

The easiest way to reach Puerto Maldonado is by flying. The town has a small airport, Padre Aldamiz International Airport (PEM), which receives daily flights from Cusco and Lima. If you’re coming from Cusco, you’re in luck—there are direct flights that take only about 1 hour. However, if you’re flying from Lima, you’ll need to connect through Cusco, as there are no non-stop flights. LATAM, Sky Airline, and JetSMART are the main airlines that operate this route.

We flew directly from Cusco, and I was glued to the window the entire time. Once we started descending into the Amazon, the views were absolutely unreal – just an endless stretch of deep green jungle as far as you can see. Absolutely insane!

FYI – there’s now an 8-10 hour bus from Cusco, thanks to a newly built highway connecting the two cities. But honestly, with flights being so quick and affordable, I’d stick with the plane!

Step 2: Transfer to the Lodge’s Office

Most jungle lodges offer airport pickup, which makes things super easy. After landing, a lodge representative was waiting for us right outside baggage claim to shuttle us into town, where we made a quick stop at their office. 

This is where you’ll pack your duffle bag for the jungle (lodges typically provide these to limit luggage weight on the boat). Your main suitcase stays securely stored at the office while you head into the rainforest with just the essentials. 

I was definitely overthinking what to bring, but they gave clear instructions – bug spray, a flashlight, and extra socks were non-negotiables! Way more info on what to pack further down in this Peru Amazon blog post – promise it’s not as difficult as it seems to pack!

Step 3: Drive to the River Port

Once everyone’s packed and ready, it’s time for a 30 to 45-minute drive on a bumpy dirt road to the river port. The ride itself is a bit of an adventure – we passed through thick jungle, small villages, and the occasional roadside stand selling fresh coconuts. Keep your eyes peeled for wildlife; we unfortunately didn’t see anything just yet.

Step 4: Boat Ride into the Amazon

Now for the best part – the 2 to 3-hour boat ride deep into the rainforest! You’ll cruise along the Tambopata or Madre de Dios River, depending on which lodge you’re staying at. These long, motorized canoes have a roof for shade and comfy seats for the ride. The journey isn’t just transportation – it’s your first real introduction to the Amazon. Our guide pointed out howler monkeys, capybaras, caimans, and even some vibrant macaws along the way.

By the time you reach your lodge, you’ll feel completely immersed in the Amazon, surrounded by nothing but jungle sounds and the flowing river. For reference, we took an early morning flight, and didn’t arrive at the lodge until almost sunset. It was a long and tiring travel day, but well worth it!

What to Bring to the Amazon Rainforest 

Packing for the Amazon is all about staying cool, dry, and bite-free – but let’s be real, no one is walking out of the jungle sweat-free (I looked like a glazed donut the entire time, haha). 

The lodge provides a duffel bag, so you’ll need to pack light (aka, your giant suitcase stays behind). Just note that nothing really dries in the jungle, so if something gets wet, be prepared to wear it damp or let it stay that way until you’re back in civilization!

Here’s what you’ll actually want to bring:  

Clothing & Footwear  

  • Long pants: Lightweight and breathable to keep bugs off while not roasting alive.  
  • Cool, loose clothing: Think moisture-wicking fabrics, NOT jeans. Trust me.  
  • High socks: For tucking your pants into (yes, you’ll look ridiculous, but it keeps the bugs out).  
  • Sneakers or hiking boots/trail runners: The jungle floor can be muddy and uneven.  
  • Hat: Wide-brim for extra sun protection. Bonus if it makes you feel like an explorer.  

Essentials for Surviving the Jungle  

  • Bug spray: The strongest DEET you can find. The mosquitoes here are on another level, especially if you visit during the rainy season.
  • Sunscreen: Because even in the shade, the equatorial sun does not play.  
  • Toiletries: The basics (plus extra deodorant, because wow, the sweat is real).  
  • Portable little battery-powered fan: Absolute lifesaver in the heat and humidity.  
  • Quick-dry towel: If your lodge doesn’t provide one, you’ll want it for sweaty hikes/swims.  
  • Light rain jacket or poncho: Sudden downpours happen.  

Extras You’ll Thank Me For  

  • Headlamp or flashlight: Night walks are pitch black, and you’ll need your own light.  
  • Binoculars: To actually see that sloth your guide is pointing at.  
  • Dry bag: Protects your phone and camera from rain/humidity.  
  • Power bank: Some lodges have limited electricity, so charging devices can be tricky.  
  • Notebook & pen: If you like jotting down wildlife sightings or jungle thoughts.  
  • Earplugs: The rainforest is LOUD at night. If you’re a light sleeper, these are a must.  

I had grand plans of looking all cute and all, but after five minutes in the sweltering humidity, I gave up. Function over fashion wins every time in the Amazon, haha!

A few more packing tips to survive the jungle’s relentless moisture:

  • Go for quick-dry fabrics: Think lightweight, moisture-wicking materials like polyester or merino wool. Cotton will just soak up sweat and never fully dry.
  • Pack extra socks and underwear: Trust me, nothing is worse than putting on damp socks. Bring a few extra pairs so you always have a dry option.
  • Loose, breathable clothing is key: Tight clothes will cling to your sweaty skin – stick to loose-fitting pants and shirts to stay comfortable.
  • Waterproof everything: Use dry bags or plastic bags with a zip (ziplock bags) to keep essentials (like electronics and important documents) from getting damp.
  • Bring a small microfiber towel: Dries faster than a regular towel and is perfect for wiping off sweat or drying off after a shower.
  • Antifungal powder or wipes: The combo of heat, sweat, and damp clothes can cause skin irritation – this helps keep things fresh.

And the most important tip? Mentally prepare for the humidity! No matter what you wear, you’re going to be sweaty and damp – just embrace it!

Where to Stay in Puerto Maldonado

We stayed at Tambopata Ecolodge, and it was everything I hoped for in an Amazon jungle lodge – remote, eco-friendly, and completely immersive in nature. Tucked deep in the rainforest, the lodge is only accessible by boat, making the journey there feel like part of the adventure. 

We slept in thatched-roof bungalows that were rustic but comfortable, with mosquito-netted beds, open-air designs, and candlelit ambiance at night (no electricity in the rooms, but honestly, that just added to the experience). Meals were freshly prepared and surprisingly delicious, and the staff was fantastic – super knowledgeable and passionate about the jungle. Even our room keys were capybara keychains!

One of my favorite parts? Falling asleep to the sounds of the Amazon, from distant howler monkeys to the chorus of frogs and cicadas. If you’re looking for a true off-the-grid Amazon experience without sacrificing comfort, Tambopata Ecolodge is an incredible choice.

How Long to Stay

Most people stay 2-3 nights in the Amazon, which is enough time to soak up the jungle experience without going into full survival mode. We did 2 nights, and it felt just right – plenty of adventure, wildlife sightings, and sweaty hikes without overstaying in the heat and humidity. 

Keep in mind, there’s no AC, so if you’re someone who struggles with the heat, you might not want to push it much longer. I was content with our 2 night stay, and was so ready to wash off all the sweat once we got back to Lima!

Here’s a general overview of our 2 night, 3 day stay in the Amazon:

  • Day 1: nonstop flight from Cusco to Puerto Maldonado in the AM, transfer to the lodge’s office where we packed our duffel bags, bumpy drive to catch our boat (with lunch en route), boat ride down the Rio Madre De Dios spotting capybaras, macaws, and caimans, arrived at the lodge, introduction and dinner, night walk through the pitch-black jungle
  • Day 2: breakfast, hike through the jungle and boat ride, lunch, afternoon monkey walk through the forest, lodge relaxation time, dinner, late night boat ride to spot white caimans and star gazing
  • Day 3: breakfast, last look at the rainforest, ride back to the lodge office to pick up our suitcases, direct flight to Lima

It was a busy (and exhausting) few days, but you’ll really wanna pack it all in so you get the most possible chances to spot wildlife.

What to Expect at Tambopata Ecolodge 

The Food

I’ll be honest – I wasn’t expecting much when it came to jungle cuisine, but Tambopata Ecolodge totally delivered. Every meal was fresh, flavorful, and way better than I expected for being so deep in the rainforest. There was a great variety of dishes, and they made sure to rotate meals so you weren’t eating the same thing every day. Each meal was served buffet style, so you could fill up on as much as you wanted. 

Expect plenty of rice, root vegetables, and carbs – because, let’s be real, all that jungle trekking works up an appetite. 

Some standout dishes? Fried plantains, yucca, black beans, and tender chicken wrapped in banana leaves. We also had pork with a rich curry sauce, creamy avocado, fresh tropical fruit, and even dessert every night (the passionfruit flan and pie de manzana were amazing!). Breakfasts were simple but hearty, with fried eggs, fresh fruit juices, and more carbs to fuel the day ahead.

Water is technically potable, but it had a slightly brownish tint, so I personally didn’t risk it. Luckily, you can buy bottled water, soft drinks, and cocktails at the bar. Speaking of which, do yourself a favor and order a passionfruit mojito – refreshing, fruity, and the perfect way to end a long day of jungle exploring.

Health in the Amazon

I was most anxious about my health in the Amazon, considering there’s all kinds of scary mosquito-borne diseases out there and no major hospitals nearby. According to the CDC, a yellow fever vaccine is recommended, so I highly recommend you get that before visiting. It was a bit difficult to get back home in California, so I recommend looking into the vaccine a few months before your trip. Of course talk to your doctor!

While malaria hasn’t been reported in the area for over 35 years, I still took the full dose of my malaria pills as directed by my doctor – better safe than sorry. 

Also, the humidity and heat make it super easy to get dehydrated, so drinking tons of water is a must. The lodge provides potable water, but I also brought electrolyte packets to help stay hydrated (and because plain water gets boring after a while).

Bugs in the Amazon

Yes, there are bugs – duh, it’s the Amazon Rainforest – but honestly, not as many as I expected. And nothing too scary.

Inside the bungalows, we barely saw any, which was a relief. Just remember to keep the door shut unless you want some unexpected visitors. Around the lodge and out exploring, we saw giant moths, butterflies (that landed on our heads!), lots of spiders (some large, some small), and plenty of massive cicadas making their presence known. Bug spray was a lifesaver, especially in the evenings. 

And just like in Lake Atitlan in Guatemala, always look inside your shoes before putting them on – you never know what might be hiding inside. Still gives me the creeps just thinking about it. 

Sleeping 

Note that this experience is not for the faint of heart – the jungle is hot, buggy, and wild. If you’re looking for luxury, this ain’t it. Overall, we were pretty comfortable, but the intense humidity really got to us pretty quickly.

Each bed has a mosquito net, which made me feel like I was in some sort of jungle fairytale – minus the insane humidity. It gets crazy humid at night, and there’s no AC, so you just have to deal with it. Luckily, I fell asleep fast and didn’t wake up until the howler monkeys started their ungodly morning calls. 

Note that the bungalows are semi-shared, meaning you’ll have another group on the other side of a thin wall – we got lucky and had a friend over there, but you can hear everything, literally word for word. Be respectful unless you wanna annoy your neighbors, haha. There are private bathrooms though, with hot showers and flushable toilets! Although I actually preferred warm/cold showers because it was too damn hot and the cool water felt super refreshing (kinda like when I visited Croatia in August, whoops). 

WiFi & Electricity

There’s absolutely no cell service out here – it’s a true digital detox! WiFi is only available during meal times (early morning, 11 AM – 2 PM, and 5 – 10 PM), so don’t expect to be scrolling Instagram all day. Electricity is also limited to certain hours, mainly surrounding meal times, so that’s when you’ll want to charge your phone and camera batteries. 

Some rooms have working lights during those hours, but others don’t – hence the candles in each room. The lodge provides flashlights, but my friend also brought their own headlamp, which was a game-changer at night.

Activities to Immerse Yourself in the Amazon

One of the best things about staying at Tambopata Ecolodge is how much there is to do – no WiFi, no distractions, just pure jungle adventure. Whether you’re into hiking, wildlife spotting, or just taking in the sheer vastness of the Amazon, there’s something for everyone.

Just note that most days start at sunrise (or earlier!) because that’s when the animals are most active. We typically went on an early AM excursion, got back to the lodge around lunch time, ate and relaxed for a bit, then went out on an afternoon excursion before dinner. Night activities were offered as well!

Of course, nature doesn’t work on a schedule, so every experience is different. Come in with zero expectations and you’ll be amazed by the surprises the jungle has in store.

River Boat Tour

Gliding down the river felt like something out of a documentary. We saw caimans, capybaras (and tiny capybara babies!!!) chilling on the banks, bush turkeys, side-neck turtles sunbathing, red and green macaws, flying parakeets, herons, and even a horned screamer (which has to be one of the weirdest-sounding birds ever). Wish we had gotten lucky with a sloth sighting, but oh well!

Jungle Night Walk

Exploring the Amazon after dark is a whole different experience. With flashlights in hand, we followed our guide into the pitch-black jungle where we spotted massive spiders (including tarantulas and the infamous “chicken spider”), stick bugs camouflaged against branches, Amazon bamboo rats darting through the undergrowth, and endless trails of bullet ants and army ants. It’s kinda wild because you initially don’t see anything at all, and you need to look super closely.

And ohhh the sounds. Cicadas screaming, crickets chirping, and something rustling in the trees that I definitely didn’t want to meet. I have to admit, this was a little out of my comfort zone. It was pitch black – so dark I couldn’t even see my own hands in front of my face. Definitely not a place to wander off solo. And remember not to touch ANYTHING or stray from the group – some of the plants here can be just as dangerous as the wildlife! 

Stargazing

Since there’s practically zero light pollution, the night sky is insanely clear. Millions of stars, and even the Milky Way stretching across the sky – one of the most magical things I’ve ever seen.

Night Caiman Spotting

Drifting down the river in the dark (it was pitch black with zero light at all), our guide’s flashlight scanned the banks until – bam – a pair of glowing red eyes stared back at us. We spotted several white caimans, lurking in the shallows, completely still. Slightly eerie, but super cool. 

I will say this was a tad underwhelming until we saw the caimans; it definitely took a while to find and actually see any (it’s dark!). Since I was staring at the night sky and taking photos of the Milky Way… I honestly didn’t mind the wait too much (to say I was mesmerized by the night sky was a MASSIVE understatement). Floating on the river in total darkness, with the sky bursting with stars, was honestly just as magical as spotting the caimans themselves.

Hiking & Nature Walks

Whether you’re up for a short 2km stroll or a longer 12km trek, the hikes here are packed with Amazonian wonders. We saw giant ironwood trees, the towering ceiba tree, Brazil nut trees, strangler figs, dry wood termites, and leaf-cutting ants carrying leaves back to their underground nests. Oh, and a plant called “dead monkey fingers” – yes, that’s a real thing.

We even saw a tarantula emerging from its hole in the ground – our naturalist expertly lured it out, and we caught the entire interaction on camera… with the phone just inches away! Watching its hairy legs cautiously creep into the open was equal parts thrilling and nerve-wracking. So wild – it was such a surreal and adrenaline-pumping experience!

Prepare to get all hot and sticky – bring a lot of water and don’t feel like you need to do a long trek in order to see a lot. We only hiked a few miles and still saw lots!

Monkey Walk

We set out in the rainforest hoping to see some primates, and sure enough, we spotted a troop of red howler monkeys hanging out in the canopy. It took us a long while, and we almost didn’t see any at all. But at the last moment, we spotted quite a few and had an exciting time watching them jump around. You’ll want a super long zoom in order to capture them; the ones we saw were high in the treetops. Thankfully my friend managed to get a few shots, although they’re not the clearest, haha.

If you’re lucky, you might also see capuchins, dusky titi monkeys, spider monkeys, or squirrel monkeys swinging through the trees.

Swimming in the Nearby Creek

If you need to cool off from the jungle heat, there’s a refreshing little creek near the lodge where you can take a dip. It’s not exactly a luxury infinity pool, but after a humid day in the rainforest, it’s absolute heaven. 

Psst – I had heard there were leeches in the water, but a few of my group members went in and only said good things, and thankfully saw no leeches, but it may depend on the time of year. I’d ask the staff at the lodge their opinion before going in.

Other Activities in the Amazon near Puerto Maldonado

Note that activities vary by lodge, so I didn’t get the chance to do these myself – but they’re definitely on offer at many places in the Amazon.

Some of the more adventurous activities available at certain lodges include:

  • Canopy Walkway & Jungle Hike: Some lodges have towering canopy walkways, giving you a bird’s-eye view of the jungle. From up here, you might spot toucans, sloths, or even a curious monkey peering down at you.
  • Monkey Island: A few lodges visit islands where rescued monkeys roam freely. These little guys are known for their playful antics – and their sneaky attempts to snatch snacks!
  • Piranha Fishing: If you’re feeling bold, some lodges offer piranha fishing trips. From what I’ve heard, they bite fast, and in some places, they’ll even cook up your catch for you!

Would I have tried these if I had the chance? Maybe. (Okay, probably, haha).

Final Thoughts on the Peruvian Amazon

Would I do it again? No question. The Amazon is a place like no other—breathtaking, humbling, and yes, occasionally itchy. Next time, I’ll come armed with industrial-strength bug spray, a headlamp, and maybe a bit more mental preparation for those tarantulas.

Are you planning a trip to the Amazon anytime soon?!



The post 3 Days in the Peruvian Amazon Rainforest (Puerto Maldonado) appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/amazon-rainforest-peru-puerto-maldonado/feed/ 0
2024 Year in Review: My Most Traveled Year Yet https://apassionandapassport.com/2024-year-in-review/ https://apassionandapassport.com/2024-year-in-review/#respond Sat, 01 Mar 2025 08:04:51 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31927 Hello 2025! Another fresh, new year. But seriously, where did 2024 go? It feels like just yesterday I was ringing in the New Year in Hallstatt, Austria.  Every year (since 2013!) I’ve been writing Year in Review recaps that take a look at my life over the last 12 months. These are some of myContinue Reading

The post 2024 Year in Review: My Most Traveled Year Yet appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Hello 2025! Another fresh, new year. But seriously, where did 2024 go? It feels like just yesterday I was ringing in the New Year in Hallstatt, Austria

Every year (since 2013!) I’ve been writing Year in Review recaps that take a look at my life over the last 12 months. These are some of my favorite posts to write, as I really get to look back at the last year and relive some of my best memories. Check out my past year in reviews here if you’re interested! 

And this year was an extraordinary one for sure – it somehow ended up being my most traveled year yet! By July, I had already been to 5 continents (wild considering I have a full-time job), and the traveling didn’t stop there! I aimed to skip visiting Mexico for a full year with hopes it’d motivate me to see other spots, and I think that definitely helped (although I dearly love the country and already have a trip booked there in early 2025, haha).

In 2024 I went skiing for the first time (so fun!), crossed off a new wonder of the world (Machu Picchu!), marveled at the Sydney Opera House and teared up at koalas in the wild in AUSTRALIA (!!!), ate tons of hot honey hotteok, kimbap, and black sesame ice cream in Asia, and spent over a month in Europe. 

2024 was also the year I became the world’s newest Swiftie (and even tried to score a last minute ticket to her show in Dublin, but of course it was the hardest European destination to get because of the restrictive laws in Ireland!). 

There were also some wonderful moments closer to home too. And one of the best ones? My sister had a beautiful baby girl (meaning I’m an auntie again!) and I swear she’s the cutest little thing. I got to meet her in October and I’m in love!

I also went to my first-ever travel blogging conference and had my first-ever $20k+ month from my blog (a huge milestone for me!).

It was also a big year for astronomy, with a full solar eclipse, Comet A3, AND the northern lights shining bright on SO much of America (twice – which I missed both times, just my luck). 

A big realization I had this year is that I’m either away adventuring hard, or hanging at home doing a puzzle, reading, or scrapbooking – there’s no in between for me. I’m starting to enjoy being more of a homebody in California (and starting to find my community here), and that just tells me one thing – my body craves rest when I’m not traveling. Something I’m aiming to prioritize more in the new year (although I keep saying that and it never happens, haha).

2024 by the Numbers

  • Countries Traveled To: 12 – Belgium, England (x2), USA, Australia, South Korea, Italy, San Marino, Ireland, Peru, Japan, France, Switzerland 
  • States Traveled To: 5 – California, Wyoming, Utah, New York (x2), Hawaii (x2) 
  • # of flights: 35
  • Miles flown: 95k
  • Books read: 72
  • Candy Crush Level: 3954
  • Duolingo Streak: 933
  • Days traveling: 144 (39% of the year, which is pretty wild considering I work full time!)
  • Solo travel days: 17 (in mostly Italy, San Marino, and Ireland)

Something I do wanna mention is that this post is coming out a few weeks later than my year-end recaps usually do. To be completely honest, blogging has sort of lost its excitement and sparkle. It just doesn’t feel as fun as it used to. Plus, I’m super overwhelmed with all the trips and destinations I have yet to write about. A good problem to have (I guess), but when the backlog is well over 50 posts long and 15 destinations deep, well, it feels like you’ll never catch up. We’ll see how much I write in 2025, but I’m not pressuring myself. 

Enough about that, let’s get to it! Here’s my 2024 year in review!

January

Bruges, Belgium

We started off the year exploring a new country together – Belgium! I have to admit I knew literally nothing about Bruges (or Belgium in general) before booking our train tickets, but boy am I glad we made the effort to get over here.

The main reason we went? To soak up all the Christmas spirit in Bruges (and lucky us, they continue celebrating well into the new year!). I swear, the literal moment we arrived, I fell in love with the city, yes, even despite the initial heavy rain!

We spent a few days indulging in *all* the chocolate, *all* the waffles, some extremely decadent hot chocolate (mine tasted exactly like speculoos and it was glorious), and of course ate way too many fries (when in Belgium, am I right?).

So much of our time in Bruges was spent just wandering the cute storybook town, strolling along the canals (kinda a mix of Amsterdam and Venice!), checking out the quirky frietmuseum (and learned even more about potatoes!), popping into chocolate shops every 2 minutes, taking photos in front of the old guild houses in Market Square, and taste testing everything at the market.

There’s just something so magical and charming about Bruges, especially during Christmas. It seemed like every single shop, pharmacy, and building put up decorations – everyone was super into the Christmas spirit, creating so much positive and happy energy. 

Despite our original flight to London getting canceled and sitting behind a lady who literally coughed the entire 10-hour flight home (and refused to wear a mask… cue the eye rolls), we had *such* a good trip. Europe in the winter is it – especially around the holidays. 

Jackson Hole, Wyoming

If you’ve been following me for a while now, you know I plan birthday trips for myself every year. It’s a goal I’ve been keeping up with for quite a few years (I’ve spent past birthdays in Mexico City, Todos Santos, San Luis Obispo, Oahu, etc). 

Since I’m currently on my way to visiting all 50 states, I decided a snowy long weekend in Jackson, Wyoming would be it for my 37th!

And what a great idea that was! The trip started off great with free mimosas at the airport and then six moose sightings within 5 minutes of leaving the airport! Despite the Tetons hiding for most of our trip, the landscapes were still incredible.

Over the long weekend we met the cutest misfit doggies while dog sledding, took the tram up 10k feet to get waffles and hot cocoa at Corbet’s Cabin, watched the skiers sitting by the fire with some hot apple cider, spent an epic morning snowmobiling to hot springs (by far one of the coolest things we’ve done!), tried so many great restaurants, and searched for wildlife in Grand Teton National Park (watched a bunch of moose graze in the snow, bighorn sheep on the mountain tops, the cutest fluffy red fox, mule deer, and more). 

We also explored the tiny town filled with an eclectic mix of cowboy shops and ski shops, and even got to see the very beginning of an actual dog sled race that only happens once a year! 

To say we loved our hotel is a massive understatement (it was definitely a splurge for my birthday)! Hot cocoa bar and cookies every afternoon, great service, and the perfect location right in the middle of town. 

I also got to see a childhood friend I hadn’t spent time with in forever which was extra special (hi Li!)! We loved reminiscing – hope we can plan another reunion soon!

And I finally got to fly over the Golden Gate Bridge (with no fog!) – weird that it took this long, haha. 

And when I wasn’t traveling? I was listening to audiobooks, doing 1,000 piece puzzles, relaxing on the couch with Kona, and planning lots of future travels. Honestly, it felt really good to kinda hibernate, especially with all the rain we had.

February

The beginning of the month was dedicated to rest, and boy it felt amazing to sleep in, stay in PJs all day, and just RELAX – I think I’m finally understanding all the hype about hygge, haha.

Australia

But I couldn’t sit still for too long, because in the middle of the month I was off to Australia for almost 2 weeks (an absolute dream of mine for far too long). I was originally gonna travel solo, but ended up having Kristen join me (same gal I went to Guatemala with last February!)

And about an hour before boarding, my sister told me she’s PREGNANT! Such a shock and happy surprise! I’m gonna be such a cool aunt!

I got so lucky with an empty seat next to me for the (very long) 15 hour flight, and slept for 11 hours – practically unheard of for me. And zero jet lag; what a dream! Was somehow so much easier than going to Europe.

Sydney

First stop of the trip – spectacular Sydney! We hit the ground running at 6am right after landing – super impressed we made it to 9pm! We spent a full day wandering around the CBD finding all the best views of the Sydney Opera House, walked across the Harbor Bridge, wandered Circular Quay, had cocktails at one of the top 50 bars in the world (Maybe Sammy – so fun!), watched fireworks at Darling Harbour, perused all the little stalls at the Rocks Market, hung around the Royal Botanic Gardens, sipped drinks at the iconic Opera Bar, and watched the most beautiful sunset at Ms Macquaries Chair.

And oh, all the rumors are true – Aussies are oh so friendly!

Taking a day trip to the Australian Reptile Park to feed kangaroos and cuddle some koalas was a major highlight – such a dream (where we met the cutest baby Koala named Pete). Plus a true Aussie BBQ (including shrimp on the barbie) and a (very unsuccessful) attempt at boomerang throwing. 

Another morning we ferried over to Manly for beach boutiques, more acai, street art, and lots of sandy beach time. Safe to say I fell hard for this little town!

And then we spent a few nights over by Bondi Beach (loved it is an understatement), admired the Bondi Icebergs about a dozen times (it was a 10 min walk from our hotel), spent so much time just laying on the beach watching the surfers, browsed all the cool surf boutiques, ate so many açaí bowls and avocado toasts (I swear they taste better in Australia), and watched an epic sunset chatting with some locals.

Of course we did the stunning (yet disgustingly sticky) Bondi to Coogee walk in about 90 degree weather, and now understand why ppl rave about Sydney’s beaches so much!

Unfortunately we had to cancel our day trip to the Blue Mountains because of a freak thunder and lightning storm – it was downpouring for hours, but I thankfully still made it on my tour of the Opera House! And then of course we feasted on dumplings and buns while watching love is blind in bed (which became our thing in Australia).

Melbourne

Next up was Melbourne, such an eclectic and colorful city, with such good food and even better coffee. And so much greenery!

I took way too many photos at the Brighton Beach bathing boxes, went searching for seashells, did a hot and sticky walk over to St. Kilda (but the views were OMG), and saw the iconic Luna Park entrance.

And of course thoroughly explored the CBD – we photographed a whole slew of Melbourne’s famous laneways (covered in funky street art), tried a bunch of gelato spots, wandered through some actually cool (and free!) modern museums, tried Melbourne’s famous croissant at Lune, admired the leafy gardens, walked along the Yarra River a bit, headed up the dome at The State Library of Victoria, and browsed the airy Queen Victoria Market. Spending an afternoon in Fitzroy popping into thrift stores, boutiques, and people watching was another highlight, too!

One of my favorites? Road tripping the Great Ocean Road, stopping at all the famous viewpoints (those 12 apostles reminded me so much of the Algarve in Portugal!), having some delicious fish n chips, and hiking down to a waterfall in the rainforest. Such a fun time with fun people – our guide was seriously the cutest and we saw kangaroos hanging out on a golf course (which is apparently so normal here!)

We spotted koalas in the wild (!!!) on a day trip to French Island, then spent the rest of the night watching the most adorable tiny penguins waddle their way out of the ocean on Phillip Island during the nightly Penguin Parade (plus saw dozens of wallabies – plus a baby wallaby in a pouch too!) So much wildlife I could not believe it.

Our day on the Mornington Peninsula was filled with epic views, colorful bathing boxes, and a relaxing boat ride around Sorrento. Think I’ll be back to Australia sooner than later, and still can’t believe I made it down under in 2024!

March

Another low-key start to the month. Guess you can say I’m really loving spending time at home with Kona, lol. I was in a slow season of life (hanging at home on the weekends in my PJs) and that’s ok!

The rain finally ended, and we got some lovely early spring weather – plus the cherry blossoms in our neighborhood started to bloom and we had tons of hummingbirds on our balcony (which I always love)!

I fell hard for Australia in February, and spent loads of time writing blog posts on Melbourne and Sydney, and finally started (and finished) a Bill Bryson novel I bought 10+ years ago!

Unfortunately my Facebook account got disabled, so I spent loads of time trying to sort that out. Eventually I just gave up and was sans Facebook for a long while. Still never recovered that account… and all those photos unfortunately. 

Busan, South Korea 

We ended the month with a spring break/cherry blossom trip to Korea! The first few days were spent in the seaside city of Busan

We had our first Korean street foods at BIFF square (where we discovered our love for kimbap and hotteok), rode the colorful IG famous sky capsules, watched a drone show at Gwangalli beach, checked out the colorful Gamcheon Village, wandered around Huinnyeoul Culture Village, had breakfast/snacks at cafes overlooking the sea, saw the skyline lit up at night, got some nature at Taejongdae Resort Park, wandered around the lively Haeundae Beach, and rode the cute locals tram up the mosaic steps. 

Other highlights were catching the most beautiful sunset with the most perfect view of the sky capsules, checking out Yonggungsa Temple, the beautiful temple by the sea (and the only one in all of Korea!), and our authentic seafood BBQ of clams and jumbo prawns. 

We also INCREDIBLY loved how everyone is obsessed with their dog – tons of cute outfits on each and every one (jackets and dresses and little shoes). All so, so cute!

Plus the Cherry Blossom Festival in Jinhae! It was busy, busy, busy (of course!), but well worth the struggle to get photos, haha. We totally lucked out with the most gorgeous sunny day and couldn’t believe how many cherry trees there were! And naturally, ate as many festive foods as we could – so many strawberry things, and my first (of many!) strawberry milks!

April

Seoul, South Korea

After a few days in Busan and Jinhae, we spent almost a week in Seoul, and wow, what a vibrant, busy city it is! Truly a city that never sleeps. Was definitely a nice change of pace from the slower life in Busan.

We really lucked out with both the weather and cherry blossoms! No rain at all and peak bloom our entire trip, which I’m SUPER grateful for after so many missed out on the late blossoms in Japan.

We explored different neighborhoods every day; there’s so much to see and do here it’s insane! Our days were spent exploring the traditional area of Ikseondong with tons of old school architecture, running up and down the escalators at the Coex Mall a few too many times (haha), dancing to Gangnam style in Gangnam, and making perfume and getting (our first-ever) facials in Hongdae.

And OF COURSE we ate all the street food in Myeongdong (egg bread! roasted marshmallows! tteokbokki), customized so much Nike clothing and sneakers!, perfected the Korean Photo Booth, ate at tons of popular cafes (Mil toast! Cheongsudong! Salt bread! Nudake!), got silly caricatures drawn up, sipped tea in a traditional tea house, sent letters to our future selves, had ramen and fried chicken by the Han River under the cherry blossoms, and ate our fair share of KBBQ. Plus midnight fried chicken (in bed!) two nights in a row – totally our style!

One of my favorite experiences?! Renting traditional hanbok for a day and feeling like a Korean princess! We admired the beautiful Gyeongbokgung Palace, watched the changing of the guards, and wandered Bukchon Hanok Village – so many photos!

One night we had fried chicken and cheered on the Twins at a baseball game (Koreans love the sport), and another we took a market food tour of Gwangjang Market – where we tried famous hand cut noodles and met the famous Netflix chef, plus learned a few Korean drinking games (and had our first sochecks)!

Plus, the best welcome home surprise! We walked off the plane and through customs, and our good friend Mel was waiting for us to say hi!!! 💕

Utah for WITS! 

Oh WITS Utah, you were truly something special. I had been toying with the idea of attending WITS for a few years (and even bought tickets the year before but ended up selling them!), so finally attending was super memorable! 

The weekend was spent meeting the most inspiring, authentic, courageous, welcoming, and motivated women. And I’m grateful to call a bunch of them good friends already 💕 and even have inside jokes with a bunch (#bus4). It was so easy to create real connections – No competition, just uplifting encouragement and deep conversations. The whole weekend felt so wholesome and nourishing – something I’m looking for more of in 2025.

Some key messages I don’t wanna forget from the creator sessions:

  • I am an expert, AND I don’t know a lot. 
  • NOT an influencer, a BUSINESS OWNER
  • My biggest competitor & hindrance to my success is Myself and my fear
  • Think of yourself as an investor in the travel ecosystem 
  • “Too many of us are not living our dreams because we are living our fears.”

And of course there was lots of fun, too! The tourism board treated us to a Welcome Party/night at the museum with dirty sodas, spinning photo booths, and dinosaur exhibits all to ourselves. We had a full day out in Park City – where I skied for my first time ever (and actually loved going down the bunny slopes, minus the gear and boot situation, haha), wandered around downtown Park City, and indulged in a Swiss-style dinner party with fondue and fireplaces by the snow. I’ll never forget the wildly unexpected night out line dancing with Marissa and Caroline! 

The perfect ending to the perfect weekend with so many new friends? Creating content at the stunning Bonneville Salt Flats at sunset!

It wasn’t the business sessions, the parties, the outdoor activities, the fireside dining, etc. The strong connections and late night laughs are what really made the weekend so ridiculously special. My heart left so, so full. A true highlight of the entire year (easily). 💕 Until WITS 2025 in NYC!

I also got my passport renewed in April and it somehow only took a few days to get (guess that’s why they call it expedited!).

May

May was a low-key month at home besides a few fun weekend trips. I also desperately went looking for the northern lights in my backyard during the crazy geomagnetic storm where the lights were visible in so much of the US! I think I saw the absolute faintest ones – just a pink and purple hue in the sky?! Still not checked off my bucket list though. I also had my first $20k+ month from my blog! So proud of myself!

Universal Studios! 

We spent SUCH a fun weekend in SoCal at Universal Studios Hollywood! It was our first time visiting, and actually our first major amusement park together (which is honestly kinda wild). 

Early access to Super Nintendo World was way worth it – we rode Mario Kart (easily the most sought after ride in the park) twice in less than a half hour! We of course went on every single ride in the park (including the Studio Tour), many multiple times! Our faves were The Mummy, Harry Potter, Jurassic World, Transformers, and the Minions. Thankfully we got so lucky with wait times and don’t think we spent more than 25 minutes waiting for a ride!

Having two days in the park meant we could eat all the treats as well (including multiple frozen butter beers, a giant pink donut from the Simpsons, minion banana pudding, ? Block tiramisu from Toadstool Cafe, and lots more).

The attention to detail in all the themed spaces were super impressive – including the replica dinosaurs (whoa that triceratops and the baby raptor, plus Blue!), all the moving video game components at Super Mario World, Harry Potter World, and Simpsons. WE LOVED IT ALL!

And of course we ended the trip with our favorite ice cream from Handels on the drive back home! All in all, SUCH a fun weekend and don’t think we’ll wait 20+ years until our next major amusement park together!

Santa Barbara 

Later in the month, we popped down to Santa Barbara for a quick weekend at the beach. Although Mother Nature had other plans and there was NO sun and way chillier than we anticipated, so we didn’t relax at the beach like we hoped (which was the complete opposite of our last time here when it was stiflingly hot and unbearably sticky). Definitely wasn’t the SB weekend we had in mind, but ya win some and ya lose some!

Instead we ate at our favorite restaurants (Secret Bao!) and tried some new ones (Bettina! La Super Rica Taquería!), and took long walks in downtown SB and some new-to-us parks overlooking the beach. But the best part was seeing some friends of ours we hadn’t seen since our last visit to SB (hey Lena and Bassam!) at the botanical gardens! Plus their two adorable little kiddos! 

Our few days there finally prompted me to write a weekend guide to Santa Barbara – a few years in the making (go peep the post – photos from past trips are gorgeous)! Too bad we had shitty weather this time!

June

New York

As soon as work finished up for the school year, I was off to New York to visit my sister! AND have her BABY SHOWER, which was absolutely perfect. Including tons of cute details like flavored champagne for giveaways, itty bitty baby clothes as decorations, and tons of fun baby games. It definitely was so wild seeing my sister pregnant!

The rest of the time was spent purely relaxing, hanging out with family (plus time in Port Jeff), lots of sister chats, and going through tons of baby stuff!

Puglia, Italy

A few days after getting home from NY (okay fine, only 2 days – told you summer is always jam packed!), I was off on a FANTASTIC 10 day Puglia road trip down in Southern Italy with Noah. 

We saw plenty (and plenty) of charming Italian towns, historic UNESCO World Heritage sites, and beautiful beaches along the stunning coastline. We gazed at endless olive groves (and of course tried so much olive oil!), wandered hilltop towns, ate gelato every single day, plus TONS of orecchiette pasta, fresh mozzarella cheeses, torrali, and focaccia (easily the best one in Polignano a Mare). 

Every day was spent exploring all the towns by the sea – Polignano a Mare, Otranto (our absolute favorite), Monopoli, and Gallipoli, plus the hilltop towns of Locorotondo, Cisternino, and Alberobello. Heck, we hardly woke up before 8am, and if it weren’t for all the crazy drivers, it would’ve felt like a real vacation, haha.

Some of my favorite experiences were sleeping in an authentic trulli, having a farm to table romantic dinner on a masseria, and the cheese tasting/demonstration on a local farm (where we not only feasted on way too much cheese, but learned and saw exactly how burrata is made).

Before leaving the area, we also spent a few nights in magical Matera – we slept in the most epic cave hotel (with an epic cave spa included), watched sunset over the sassi every night, pet so many cute kitties, and thoroughly explored the sassi (old town) and all the ancient rock churches. When we weren’t dripping with sweat and navigating the sassi maze, we were loving it, haha. 

There were far too many tourists for our liking (especially after coming from southern Puglia), but glad we got to experience the town before it gets even more popular! We also stopped at the famous bridge in the latest James Bond movie (in Gravina in Puglia), indulged in bread made in 750+ year old ovens (in Altamura), and watched the nonnas make the pasta in Bari! 

We were pleasantly surprised by the lack of crowds in early June – the complete opposite of other areas of Italy we’ve been to, like Venice, Cinque Terre, Rome, Florence, and of course the Amalfi Coast. The whole area seems kinda undiscovered, and we mostly encountered Italian tourists (with a handful of Americans thrown in). 

It was hard not to fall hard for Puglia, especially since we stuffed our faces with way too much pasta, had gelato every single day (whoops), took plenty of dips in the sparkling sea, saw half a dozen Italian towns, neither of us got drastically sunburned, and we only got one parking ticket! Come soon – I’d say most of our trip was 85% Italian tourists or so, BUT I see that changing sooner than later. Such a special place 🇮🇹💕

Florence, Italy

Before booking my trip to Italy with Noah, I knew I wanted to stay a bit longer to explore more of the country. And I hadn’t even realized I’d been to Florence before (about 8 years ago for only a day on a group tour). Despite the 90F muggy days, I truly loved this city!

I saw so much impressive art, like Michaelangelos’ David at the Accademia Gallery and The Birth of Venus and Medusa at the Uffizi (I’m not normally an art person but I just had to see these oh-so-famous pieces in person). I climbed up not one, not two, but three towers – the cupola dome (by far the hardest), the clock tower, and Al Forno Tower for direct views of the duomo). And I watched a gorgeous sunset at Piazzale Michelangelo with thousands of my newest friends (the crowds were beyond insane). 

I also took a day trip to the Italian countryside, and loved the small towns in Tuscany (Siena, Colle di Val d’Elsa, and San Gimignano – where I of course had to try what was claimed to be the best gelato in the world). My pasta making and tiramisu cooking class in Florence was a highlight as well, where I finally learned how to make authentic ravioli and tiramisu custard! 

After spending almost a week here I really felt like I got to know the city pretty well!

San Marino

Of course when I learned I could add a new country to my list just a few hours away from Florence, you know I was there! And just like that, San Marino, the oldest surviving republic in the world, established in 301 AD, was my 48th country!

It’s also been a World Heritage Site since 2008, as well as the oldest Republic and fifth smallest country in the world. San Marino is a mountainous microstate completely surrounded by Italy. It’s intense, magical, unique, and authentic, and kinda feels like a way less crowded and way less colorful Sintra, Portugal

I spent a very long day trip from Florence to San Marino, taking 2 trains and a bus, which thankfully was way easier than I anticipated. And while there, I climbed up and hiked between the 3 towers, took in plenty and plenty of fantastic mountain views, and had a delicious pizza overlooking the city. So much historic architecture – I absolutely loved the tiny country, especially because it was hardly crowded!

Naples, Italy

After finally getting to Napoli Centrale (my original train from Florence was canceled and I had to stand for three hours on a different one), I got a whole margherita pizza (obvs), explored the city a bit (way more energetic, buzzy, and eclectic than I imagined!), and then went on a food tour in the city center (with more pizza, limoncello, and sfogliatella). What an unapologetically chaotic city!

The rest of my time in Italy was spent on day trips in the area!

On Procida, I had the best time discovering this little gem of an island; it hardly felt touristy at all, especially since I visited on a weekday. I loved the super colorful pastel ports, swimming in the sparkling sea for what felt like hours, indulging in spaghetti al limone (my new fave), and taking a boat around the entire island. Plus the locals were oh so sweet and I was even invited into a traditional fisherman’s home. Easily one of my best days in Italy!

On the other hand, Capri is way overrated in my opinion, and felt ridiculously touristy and crazy overpriced (girls I met paid €8 each for a regular hot tea!). It was also super shitty weather (pouring rain practically the entire day) and was probably the worst tour itinerary I’ve ever booked (took 4 hours to get there when it takes only 50 min via ferry from Naples… someone explain that to me…). I’d consider going back in the future but will definitely be making my own way there (instead of an absurdly overpriced tour).

And finally, the Amalfi Coast! I lucked out with a gorgeous, sunny day (after the horrific rainstorm the day before), visiting the towns of Sorrento, Positano, and Amalfi, plus seeing the coast from the water via boat. Of course I had lemon sorbet in a massive lemon. And yes it was busy (that’s to be expected), but I think I’d go back and spend a few nights!

I also hit a 2 year streak on Duolingo in June! Kinda crazy that I’ve kept up with it for so long!

July

Galway, Ireland

After a few (absolutely amazing) weeks in Italy, I was off to another new country (my 49th!) – Ireland!

But to be honest, I didn’t have the greatest first impression; it was beyond pouring when I arrived (typical Irish weather I guess…) and I didn’t like the area I was staying in (there’s honestly not much to do in Salthill). It was a shock to the system for sure after spending 3 weeks in Italy (with near-perfect weather). 

But fish n chips were had, I saw some of the stunning countryside (so, so lush and a thousand shades of green), and I listened (and sang and danced) to HOURS of live music in fun Irish pubs every night so all in all a pretty fantastic time during my first few nights in Ireland. I also saw the Cliffs of Moher from above (hiking) and below (on a cruise!), and the Aran island of Inishmore. 

Before visiting I didn’t know much about Ireland and Irish culture in general so I definitely learned a lot!

Dublin, Ireland

I don’t drink much, so I found Dublin to be kinda meh to be honest. I just didn’t vibe with it — at all. I spent most of my time wandering around the Temple Bar neighborhood and photographing all the decorated pubs, although not actually drinking anything, hahaha. Plus, I severely overpaid for my hotel which always kinda sucks (mostly because Taylor Swift was in town — and no, I couldn’t get a ticket unfortunately).

I also went on a day trip to the cute little town of Kilkenny (where I had delicious bangers and mash), went on a short hike in the Wicklow Mountains and saw sheep, watched Rob (the dog!) herd some other sheep, and even got to hold a 6 day old baby lamb! The sweetest little thing!

Ireland in general just wasn’t my thing. I learned I can’t love every single place I go, and that’s totally ok. I found the nature in Ireland to be pretty (and very green), but kinda underwhelming. I’m glad I came (to see what all the fuss is about) but won’t be running back. 

Peru!

Lima, Huacachina, Paracas, Arequipa,  Colca Canyon and Chivay, Lake Titicaca, Cusco, Sacred Valley, and Machu Picchu

Now Peru? That’s a whole different story – I fell completely head over heels in love with the entire country! I loved the culture, the colors, and the cuisine (minus the guinea pig).

You know me by now, and cannot sit still so I try to really take advantage of my summer off from work, so off I was again (less than 2 weeks later) to Peru, my 50th country!!! And what a trip it was! I spent a crazy busy and adventurous 3+ weeks in Peru, and so glad I picked the longer G tour (to help relieve my anxiety about the altitude, which I had no problems with thankfully).

It was my first time doing a tour in practically 10 years, and I got lucky with the best people and the best tour guide. They soon all felt like friends I’ve known for years, and eventually we felt like a little family. Such a heartwarming, fulfilling, and intimate experience. Tons of laughter, inside jokes, and just a general sense of belonging. I’ll cherish these memories with all mis nuevas amigas forever! Llama lovers (and Freddy!), if you’re reading this, just know you’re all the very, very best human beings and our few weeks in Peru together made my heart oh so happy.

I spent a bit of time in Lima, admiring tons of pottery at Museo Larco, wandering Miraflores and saying hola to all the kitties in the park, taking in the impressive architecture in the historic district, and strolling through artsy Barranco (with cute coffee shops and art galleries). 

My few weeks were spent viewing the famous Nazca lines from above in a tiny Cessna plane, sandboarding and riding on a crazy dune buggy in the Huacachina oasis, watching sunset in Paracas, admiring volcanoes in the cute town of Arequipa, hugging tons of llamas and alpacas in Chivay, and gawking at the huge condors at Colca Canyon. 

Spending a night with a local family on Lake Titicaca was by far one of the most memorable experiences in Peru overall. We met the sweetest little girl, Valentina, helped the family with their chores – like herding their sheep (!!!) and separating lima beans, ate home-cooked meals with the family (so many potatoes!), and saw the brightest Milky Way of my life. 

Of course Cusco was a major highlight as well, spending a few days exploring the city, finding the best sunset viewpoints, ATVing to Rainbow Mountain, doing tons of window shopping, and relaxing in the main square. Plus day trips to Sacred Valley (where we met some incredible women weavers) and Ollantaytambo (one of my favorite little Andean towns with spectacular views from the ruins). 

We learned so much about Inca history and tried tons of Peruvian dishes, like ceviche, Lomo Saltado, chicha morada, causa rellena, pisco sours, chaufa, picarones, inca kola, and aji de gallina (but no guinea pig, alpaca, or llama for me!),

And the major cross off my bucket list? Machu Picchu! I got lucky with near perfect weather and a great group to explore with (although that dip in the hot springs the night before was pretty questionable, haha). Machu Picchu was nothing short of magical — what a mesmerizing blend of nature’s raw beauty and ancient human civilization! Wow, just wow! A major highlight of 2024 for sure. 

August

Peruvian Amazon

My last few days in Peru were spent in the Amazon Rainforest, and what an adventure that was (despite being perpetually hot and sticky and humid for the entire 72 hours, with very minimal electricity, haha)!

We spent our days exploring the jungle, looking for monkeys, caimans, macaws, spiders, colorful birds, capybaras, butterflies, tarantulas, leaf-cutting ants, and more. I learned so much about the flora and fauna of the rainforest, and thankfully didn’t see anything too dangerous!

And we spent our nights taking cold showers, being wowed by the night sky (Milky Way and shooting stars!), and sleeping under mosquito nets in our thatched bungalows. Waking up to the sounds of the jungle, including howler monkeys and tons of birds, was definitely part of the experience.

All in all, I was super satisfied with my time in Peru and it’s given me the urge to explore more of South America. Hopefully next summer!

And then work started again… whomp whomp! I got a new car (since my 15 year old car needed a few thousand dollars of work done… so it was time, haha). 

AND my sister gave birth to the most beautiful baby girl, Ella Brooke on August 28! So thrilled for her and her new little family! She really is the cutest newborn!

September 

September marks 10 years living in the Bay Area and doing our cross country road trip from NY to CA. Pretty wild – it definitely feels like we’re locals now, and have visited so many spots in the state! We also found out Noah has to go into work 5 days a week starting Jan 2025. Amazon’s RTO is awful!

Oahu, Hawaii

This was the first trip in a while that wasn’t planned minute by minute (what I’m known for, haha) and it felt amazing to be spontaneous for a few days.

I lived my best life in Oahu for Labor Day weekend (still feel so fortunate we can take long weekend trips to Hawaii!). We both get instantly giddy as soon as we land – must be something about that island air… and this time was no different. 

I totally forgot how breathtaking Waikiki Beach truly is (tourists and all). We swam everyday for hours, watched the Friday night fireworks, gallivanted around Honolulu, and hiked up Diamond Head (also forgot how stunning the views are from up here). 

We spontaneously rented a car one morning, and spent a few hours wading in the softest white sand, ate our way around the north shore, then watched a gorgeous sunset with sweeping views of Waikiki from Tantalus lookout. 

And oh the food! We had tons of old favorites – Mai tais at the Royal Hawaiian, macnut coffee, hula pie, LEONARDS!, acai bowls, shave ice, garlic shrimp, coco puffs, macnut crusted mahi, fresh poke – ya know, all the staples of a great Hawaiian diet, haha. 

I swam SO much, and even went home with wet salty ocean hair (kinda disgusting but oh well, haha). We almost canceled the trip because of 3 impending hurricanes that were possibly on track to hit the islands – thankfully we went because we had practically perfect weather!

Kona, Hawaii

We spontaneously bought tickets to Kona after finding good airfare and missing the ocean too much. Yes, just a few weeks after visiting Oahu, haha. Feel oh so lucky to have Hawaii right there for quick weekend trips!

It was our first time to the Big Island, and I have no idea why it took us this long to visit! I also celebrated hitting my blog income goal for the year ($200k!!!) a few months early!

We watched the sunset every night, loved gazing out into the wild lava landscapes, swam with sea turtles at the beach, and of course played around in the turquoise waters as much as we humanly could! We also indulged in kalua pork nachos, tons of shave ice, and so much fresh poke. 

By far the most epic experience of our trip?! Snorkeling with giant manta rays out in the open ocean one night – we got extremely lucky and saw over 2 dozen (when the average is typically 2-3, or so they say!). And oh the show they put on for us underwater – captivating and mesmerizing and all kinds of wild. Such gorgeous creatures and I can’t believe just how close they got to us – brushed up against my body so many times! Kinda thrilling at first and a little nerve wracking! 

We only explored a small section of the island (we only had 3 days there…), but we’ll be back since Noah’s running the Kona marathon next June!

October 

The month started off with a massive heatwave (almost 100 degrees for a week straight!), and the Yankees making it into the World Series! They lost unfortunately – I forgot how exciting baseball can be!

Kona turned 5 (!!!) later this month, and he got so spoiled at our friends house with 4 daughters to play with, new toys, a huge cookie, and they even sung happy birthday to him 🥹. Such a cute memory I never wanna forget!

I also spent way too many hours watching scrapbooking videos 😂 (currently in my scrapbooking era!) and learning all the things (ephemera, rolling adhesive, story kits, die cuts, chipboard, etc). All that seemed incredibly foreign to me at the time!

New York

It was finally time to visit my sister and her beautiful baby girl Ella, the newest addition to the fam! We spent an extra special long weekend in New York visiting, and got to see so many friends and family. 

I had a delicious taco dinner with Tara and spent hours catching up, grabbed breakfast with Alli and Dave and their crazy little kiddos, visited Mary – she’s 102!, saw my cousin Andrea, had a family dinner party with my Aunt Sue, Uncle Fred, Louise, and Henry, and even FaceTimed my parents and Lizzy!

We took Ella to the farm for pumpkins, apple pie, and apple cider donuts, ate all the bagels and Italian food, and got to spend so much uninterrupted time with Ali and Ella which filled my cup so much. Always love hanging with my sister and her little mini me just adds to the fun!

November 

November ended up being a very, very busy month, with a few weekend trips and ending in Japan. Plus, lots of friend dates (some new, some old), including an election watch party and a mini Friendsgiving. Plus I went to Filoli for the holidays for the first time (with Kessler!) and it was just as spectacular as I’d imagined. It was a much more social month for me than normal, and I loved it!

AND Noah’s parents came for a visit so we got to spend some time with them pre- and post- Japan! A little hectic but always good to see family!

The Presidential election got the US into all kinds of frenzy (like always), and I honestly cannot believe how divided our country still is. Plus, I was deep into my scrapbooking era and loving learning all the things and my personal scrapbooking style! So nice to create something that’s purely just a hobby!

Glamping in Sonoma 

After a fun glamping trip in the redwoods last year in 2023, we decided to go for round two! This time? A weekend glamping along the river at Wildhaven Sonoma! We went all out – bringing along supplies for s’mores, a full-on cheese and charcuterie plate, and steak and potatoes for dinner! Plus homemade breakfast burritos for the next morning. And of course Kona came with us too!

I’m proud of how successful we were considering we’re the very opposite of campers, lol. Although I could not believe all the stuff we needed for one night glamping. Took us multiple trips to the car!

It was a super relaxing time; we played board games, listened to music, relaxed in our tent, took lots of walks, sat by the fire, and even photographed the Milky Way!

In the area, we also wandered around Healdsburg (and saw some pretty fall foliage) before checking in, then took a walk along the water in Tiburon and got buns in SF on our way home. 

Monterey for Noah’s half marathon

The next weekend we were off on another nearby weekend trip in California. This time, down to Monterey for Noah to run a half marathon – which was actually his first race since Maui in January 2023! He ran with a friend so definitely no PR here, but his friend was very appreciative, haha. Noah described it as “a light Sunday jog”, lol. 

I’m always amazed by his ability to run long distances, when I have zero interest in even running a 5k.

It was a quick and low-key weekend, but we went to a few of our favorite spots, including a long walk at Lovers Point Park and the Pacific Grove Coastal Walk, sunset at Asilomar State Marine Reserve, and Old Fisherman’s Wharf. I’ll never say no to a weekend down in Monterey!

Japan 

And then we were off to Japan! Ever since we traveled there years ago, we’ve been obsessed with the country. And lucky for us, this was our third trip there (and probably my favorite trip yet). We split our week in Japan between Tokyo and Kyoto (rode the shinkansen of course!), with little side trips to Mt. Fuji and Osaka thrown in.

We got extremely lucky with the fall colors since the peak was 2 weeks earlier than originally expected! And you know we indulged in all our faves – black sesame ice cream, red bean mochi, tonkotsu ramen, pork katsu, fatty tuna and tomago, gyoza, matcha-flavored everything, etc, etc, etc. We go to Japan to eat, and eat we did!

Kyoto

First up, Kyoto – where we hadn’t been since our first trip to Japan back in 2017. We stayed at two beautiful properties, one right in Higashiyama 2 minutes away from the iconic Yasaka Pagoda, and the other right along the lake in Arashiyama. 

We had the most delicious kaiseki dinners (although we figured out the hard way that we absolutely despise tofu skin, haha), went to a bunch of stunning temples (Nanzen-ji Temple, Eikando Zenrin-ji, etc) to see the fall colors, and wow did they deliver, and ate tons of market food at Nishiki Market. 

Other highlights included waking up early to see sunrise at Yasaka Pagoda, wandering along Ninenzaka (where we had Starbucks sitting on tatami mats!) and Sannenzaka streets, admiring the stunning fall views at Kiyomizu-dera Temple, taking a long stroll along the Hozugawa River and the Togetsu-kyo Bridge, climbing up to the Arashiyama Park Observation Deck, strolling along dense bamboo forests, taking a super long walk (stopping at temples and shrines) en route to Abashino Nenbutsuji, and seeing the fall foliage illuminated at night at Hogon-In.

I also made a ring at Glanta, we wore kimonos and participated in a traditional matcha tea ceremony, and shopped at Nike in Gion.

Before leaving Kyoto, we took a day trip to Osaka where we admired Osaka Castle, ate our way through Kuromon Market, took silly pics with the Namba Yasaka Shrine (the one that looks like a dragon), wandered around Denden Town and the eclectic Shinseki (New World), went wild at Don Quijote once it started pouring, and took in the bright lights in Dotonbori. I’d love to spend more time in Osaka on our next trip.

Tokyo

Tokyo was basically spent eating all the sushi and fatty tuna we could get our hands on (including a few conveyor belt sushi spots and a standing sushi bar too – our new fave). It’s hard to have a bad meal in Tokyo. Never enough time in this city – and I already wanna go back!

We spent one day in modern Tokyo – sipping 3d lattes (with Kona’s face on it!), stuffing our faces with gyoza, playing with the cutest shibas and wandering Takeshita Street in Harajuku, seeing the most stunning sunset at Shibuya Sky, and having inventive cocktails at the swanky SG Club. 

Another day we focused on traditional Tokyo – starting the morning with a sushi breakfast at Tsukiji Outer Market, then spending hours testing out pens and stationary in Itoya, having dessert at the LV Cafe, and then finally making our way over to Asakusa and Senso-ji Temple.

On our last morning I ventured over to Gotokuji – the cat temple, and then wandered around Shinjuku. Always so great to go back to some old favorites and of course find some new ones along the way!

Mt. Fuji

I took a solo day trip to Mt. Fuji, and got OH so lucky with the weather – had perfectly clear conditions the entire day, and the mountain was even kinda hard to photograph because of all the sun shining!

I ventured to all the hot spots – I climbed the almost 400 steps to the Chureito Pagoda at Arakurayama Sengen Park for that iconic postcard view, saw all the koi in the clearest blue waters at Oshino Hakkai, stopped by Lawson to take lots of pics, admired the views at Oishi Park along Lake Kawaguchi, and watched all the cars zipping by on the instagram-popular Honcho Street. 

Japan, thank you for being just as fantastic as we remember. 

December

We ended the year the same way it started – at the Christmas markets in Europe! Guess it’s kinda a thing for us now? After last year’s wildly successful winter trip to Europe, we found ourselves back here to explore different markets and even head over to snowy Switzerland for a few days (which we had to sadly cancel numerous times because of 2020 events). 

It was super bitter cold for most of our trip – I don’t remember Europe being this chilly last year! We definitely had to bundle up and brave the cold.

One thing I wanna note is that I deleted IG a few days before our trip, and it made a world of a difference. My husband and I had SUCH an amazing time together, mostly free from distractions and spent tons of actual quality time together. Think I’ll be deleting social media for future trips. 

London

We had originally planned to start the trip in Paris, but after loving London at Xmas last year (so much), we decided to head back!

We saw a bunch of our faves from last year (Leicester Market, Annabel’s, dinner at Dishoom, Cartier and Dior, Neil Strain, Covent Garden, KOYN, and the angels on Regent Street, of course!), and went to plenty more new-to-us London Xmas spots. Including breakfast in an igloo at Coppa Club, lunch at Daphnes, afternoon tea at The Dalloway, Big Ben, plenty of gorgeous hotel lobbies (all decked out for Xmas of course), and an overwhelmingly busy night out at winter wonderland in Hyde Park! 

Plus the most decadent chocolate cake at EL&N (Noah was obsessed!). London was such a great way to kick off our festive holiday trip, with so many sugar biscuits, baubles, and Christmas treats.

Paris

Up next – a quick hop over to Paris where we spent Christmas Eve and Christmas Day, before making our way to Strasbourg. We had a lovely lunch at Le Train Bleu, checked out all the decorations at the major shops (although they were mostly the same as the ones in London), saw the impressive avant-garde tree at Galleries de Lafayette, and admired all the Christmas windows. 

We also saw the newly-completed Notre Dame and checked out the mini Xmas market nearby, had our first Parisian croissants and pastries of the trip (mmm I love me some pain de suisse), and got so lucky with a spontaneous yet super delicious Christmas Eve dinner!

We actually came back to Paris after Switzerland (a few weeks later), so that’ll have to wait for my 2025 year in review!

Alsace: Strasbourg, Colmar, and Obernai

After Paris, we spent a few days in the Alsace region of France to celebrate all things Christmas! And whoa – they’re definitely a few of the most festive spots we’ve ever been! 

Think over the top lights on practically every single street, huge Christmas trees filled with giant baubles, and the instagram-famous teddy bear Christmas building in Strasbourg. Makes sense since Strasbourg is the Capital of Christmas “Capitale de Noel” after all! So, so, so insanely festive, both day and night. The energy was like nowhere else I’ve ever seen.

We ate so much local market food (a mix of French, German, and Alsatian foods) – cheesy bretzels, plenty of crepes, kugelhopf, spaetzle, boules mousse (my FAVORITE), potatoes and Muenster cheese, tarte flambees, gingerbread cookies, manele (brioche buns shaped into little men!), and chocolate covered raspberries (that took forever to find, haha). 

Our few days were spent wandering through all the markets (there’s over a dozen throughout Strasbourg and Colmar with literally hundreds of chalets!), admiring the beautifully decorated carousels, and drinking so much jus de pommes chaud (hot apple cider). And of course seeing the largest decorated Christmas tree in Europe, gawking at the stately Notre Dame De Strasbourg, and loving the colorful, half-timbered buildings in Colmar (said to be the inspiration for Beauty and the Beast)!

Switzerland

Winter in Switzerland was all that I envisioned it to be, and I still cannot believe just how lucky we got with the weather (it’s always a toss up in the mountains this time of year). 

Over the course of our 3 days in the mountains (which spilled over until New Year’s Day), we practically ventured everywhere on the map! Taking trains, cable cars, gondolas, and buses – impressive how it all just works so seamlessly (the Swiss have really got it all figured out!). The peaks were absolutely spectacular, and we got insanely lucky with 3 perfectly clear days. 

And whoa; the views were even more impressive than the wintery hike we did in Hallstatt last year (which was hard to beat). Including Jungfrau, Eiger, Munch, and a whole slew of other peaks I definitely don’t remember the name of, haha. 

We feasted on delicious mountain-side schnitzels, lots of Swiss chocolate, plenty of cheese fondues, and rostis (our new fave thing).

Day 1 was spent seeing our first mountain views at the cute little town of Wengen, traipsing through the snow during the Royal Walk at Mannlichen, and checking out the cute ski shops, gawking at the wooden chalets, and having hot cocoa with rum in Grindelwald!

On Day 2 we walked over the thrilling First Cliff Walk and saw breathtaking views of the north face of the Eiger at Grindelwald First, took the Eiger Express to get even higher (and had a great schnitzel up here!), and made a quick pit stop in Kleine Scheidegg to watch the sunset. 

Psst – we actually spent 4 days in Switzerland, but half was in 2025, so that’ll have to wait until my next year in review! Always so tricky when trips spill into the next year. 

Early to mid December this blog of mine officially got hit by a Google update, which saw my traffic (and therefore income) plummet. I had been already getting a bit bored of blogging (if I’m being completely honest), but it still sucks to get hit so hard! Traffic is slowly coming back and rankings are starting to recover, so we’ll see what 2025 brings in terms of this passion project of mine. 

If you made it this far, thank you!!! Let’s see what 2025 has in store for us all!



The post 2024 Year in Review: My Most Traveled Year Yet appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/2024-year-in-review/feed/ 0
Day Trip to Alberobello: Things to do in Alberobello and Full Trulli Guide https://apassionandapassport.com/day-trip-to-alberobello-puglia/ https://apassionandapassport.com/day-trip-to-alberobello-puglia/#respond Sun, 08 Dec 2024 09:03:47 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31885 Headed to Southern Italy and wanna take a day trip to Alberobello? Follow this one day Alberobello itinerary to explore the iconic Trulli houses, try local delicacies, and take in the town’s unique atmosphere – all while soaking up centuries of history and stunning views! All my favorite things to do in Alberobello, coming rightContinue Reading

The post Day Trip to Alberobello: Things to do in Alberobello and Full Trulli Guide appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to Southern Italy and wanna take a day trip to Alberobello? Follow this one day Alberobello itinerary to explore the iconic Trulli houses, try local delicacies, and take in the town’s unique atmosphere – all while soaking up centuries of history and stunning views! All my favorite things to do in Alberobello, coming right up!

As soon as we booked our Puglia road trip, I knew we needed to take a day trip to Alberobello. I’d seen photos of those whimsical Trulli houses with their iconic cone-shaped roofs literally all over social media, and knew I needed to see them for myself. 

Was Alberobello worth a visit?! 1000% yes, but I’m glad we visited in the early AM before all the bus tours arrived, haha. It’s definitely one of Puglia’s most touristy spots… don’t say I didn’t warn ya!

Alberobello is a place where old-world charm meets laid-back vibes. There’s rows of Trulli houses, narrow cobblestone streets, cozy trattorias, and sun-kissed courtyards. And tons of fresh pasta, golden focaccia, and irresistible olive oil products. All surrounded by quirky shops with hand-painted ceramics and unique souvenirs.

So what’s so special about Alberobello anyways? Well, it’s one of Italy’s most charming and unique destinations, famous for its UNESCO-listed Trulli houses — and there’s over 1,000 of them over here! These traditional conical stone dwellings date back to the 14th century – and they’re a real architectural gem. 

But wait – what’s a trullo? A trullo (plural: trulli) is a traditional stone hut with a cone-shaped roof, typically made from local limestone. The roofs are constructed using a dry-stone technique, meaning they’re built without mortar – which makes them not only unique but also surprisingly durable. 

Originally, trulli were used as farmhouses and have deep ties to the construction traditions of this region. And lemme tell you, if you get the chance like we did, I highly recommend staying in one – it’s a one-of-a-kind experience!

So let’s get to it — the best things to do in Alberobello!

Day Trip to Alberobello Logistics

Before we get into all the fun things to do in Alberobello and my recommended one day Alberobello day trip itinerary, there’s a lot of logistics to talk about first. If you’ve read any of my blog posts before you know I’m super comprehensive…

Where is Alberobello?

First of all, where is Alberobello exactly?! 

I have to admit, before doing any research for my most recent trip to Italy, I honestly had no idea where Alberobello was. So don’t feel bad if you haven’t got a clue either, lol. Sure, I had seen (plenty of) photos of those iconic trulli houses, but did I know where they were? Nope!

And before we get into the specifics, just remember that Italy is a long and narrow country, so don’t expect to be able to hop on over to Alberobello regardless of where you are in the country! For reference, Alberobello is about 500 km from Rome, 650 km from Florence, and 850 km from Venice

While it’s certainly possible to make the trip from cities like Bari (about 70 km away) or even possibly Naples (about 250 km, but not advised), planning a day trip to Alberobello from farther cities would require some serious travel time.

So where is it?! You’ll find Alberobello in one of Italy’s most southern regions — Puglia, known as the heel of Italy. Alberobello is pretty close to most of the region’s other highlights (like Polignano a Mare, Ostuni, and Locorotondo), making it a perfect stop for a day trip on a road trip through Puglia (like we did!). 

Geographically, Alberobello is surrounded by lush countryside and rolling hills, and dotted with centuries-old olive groves and vineyards, giving it a truly picturesque charm. 

The views of the valley and the endless olive groves around town are absolutely stunning (kinda like in Locorotondo), and walking through the streets of Alberobello truly feels like stepping into a charming fairy tale. I couldn’t get enough of the scenery – it’s so striking and unlike anywhere else I’ve ever been!

When to Plan your Day Trip to Alberobello 

Like much of Italy, Alberobello experiences four distinct seasons, each offering its own charm. Whether you’re drawn to the warmth and sunshine of the summer months or the more tranquil, cozy atmosphere of the cooler seasons, there’s a perfect time to visit this magical town.

Summer (High Season): June to August

Summer in Alberobello is hot and dry, with temperatures often exceeding 30°C (86°F). If you’re after the classic Italian summer vibe – with long, sunny days, outdoor festivals, and food and wine al fresco – this is the time to visit. 

That said, it’s also the peak tourist season, and while the town is lively, the crowds can be overwhelming, especially in July and August.

Personally, I’d avoid these hottest months. Why? Well, Puglia, and Alberobello in particular, is an extremely popular destination for Italian tourists, meaning it can be tough to find accommodation, and restaurants may have long waits. Plus, it gets scorching hot, making it less enjoyable to wander around town. And definitely steer clear of Ferragosto (August 15th) when the local crowds are at their peak.

If you can, plan your trip either at the very end of May or early June – just before the high season hits. During this time, the weather is ideal, the crowds are manageable, and you can still experience the magic of Alberobello without the summer chaos. 

For reference, I visited in early June, and it was perfect – sunny and vibrant, but not too crowded… until mid day that was!

Spring (Shoulder Season): March to May

Spring in Alberobello is perfect for exploring, with mild temps ranging from 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F). This is the perfect time to stroll through the streets and soak in the beauty of the Trulli houses without breaking a sweat. 

Crowds are still low, especially in March and early April, making it a great time for budget travelers or anyone who enjoys a quieter atmosphere. Just be aware that Easter is a big holiday in Italy, so avoid visiting during that time if you prefer to stay away from crowds.

By May, many of the local attractions will be open, and you’ll find fewer tourists compared to the summer months. If you’re looking to enjoy Alberobello at a slower pace, spring is definitely the best time to go.

Fall (Shoulder Season): September to November

Fall in Alberobello starts warm in September, with temperatures still reaching summer levels, but by October and November, the weather cools to a comfortable 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F). September still sees a decent number of tourists, but by early October, the crowds start to thin, making it a more peaceful time to visit.

Accommodation prices also drop after the summer rush, especially in late October and November, so it’s a great opportunity to book a stay in one of the town’s charming Trulli. Plus, the fall landscape around Alberobello is beautiful, with the olive groves turning golden — oh I can imagine just how gorgeous that must be!

Winter (Low Season): November to February

Winter in Alberobello is cool, with temperatures ranging from 5°C to 15°C (41°F to 59°F). While you’ll find fewer tourists and better deals on accommodation, the weather can be unpredictable, with some chilly and rainy days.

If you’re planning to visit mainly for the stunning views, the Trulli, and the peaceful atmosphere, winter might be a good time for you. But if you’re hoping for pleasant weather to enjoy the outdoors and other parts of Puglia (hello Mediterranean beaches!), I’d recommend waiting until spring or fall when temperatures are more comfortable for sightseeing.

How to Get to Alberobello

By Plane

If you’re not already in Italy, the closest major airport to Alberobello is Bari Karol Wojtyła Airport (BRI), located about 65 km (40 miles) away. Although you won’t be able to fly directly to Alberobello from outside Italy, connecting flights through Rome, Naples, or Milan are your best bet. 

Once you arrive at Bari Airport, you have several options for getting to Alberobello:

  • By Car: Renting a car is highly recommended if you’re planning to visit a few towns in Puglia as it gives you the freedom to stop and enjoy the scenic countryside. The drive from Bari to Alberobello takes about 1 hour. We LOVED having a car in Puglia and definitely recommend you do the same!
  • By Train: You can take a train from Bari to Alberobello Station, which takes about 1 hour. From the station, it’s a short walk into the town center, where you can explore the Trulli and other local attractions.
  • By Bus: Alternatively, there are buses from Bari to Alberobello that take about 1.5 hours. You can check out routes from bus companies like MarinoBus or Ferrovie Appulo Lucane (FAL).

Other nearby airports include Brindisi Airport (BDS), about 1.5 hours away by car, and Naples Airport (NAP), about 3.5 hours away. If you fly into either of these airports, you’ll most likely need to transfer to Bari to catch a train or bus to Alberobello.

By Train

Getting to Alberobello by train is straightforward. You can take a train from Bari to Alberobello Station operated by Trenitalia, Italy’s national train company, which takes about 1 hour. This is an easy and scenic option, as you’ll pass through the beautiful Puglia countryside. 

From the train station, the town center is just a short walk, where you can explore the famous Trulli houses and enjoy the local sights.

By Bus

If you prefer to skip the train and take a bus, there are several companies offering direct routes to Alberobello from various cities in Italy, including Bari, Naples, and Polignano a Mare. Expect the trip from Bari to take about 1.5 hours by bus. Companies like FlixBus, MarinoBus, and Ferrovie Appulo Lucane (FAL) operate these routes, making it an easy and affordable way to get to Alberobello.

By Organized Day Trip

And if you’d rather make it super, super easy and only have time for one day in Alberobello, definitely consider an organized tour. Hey, you’re on vacation! 

Guided day trips mean you don’t have to worry about transportation (or parking!) at all! A great option if you’re navigating Puglia without a car, or just want a super stress-free day. Many day trips visit a few towns in one day, meaning you get to see quite a lot in a short amount of time!

There’s quite a few tours depending on where you’re coming from – I’m listing some highly rated ones below:

  • From Lecce: Ostuni, Alberobello, and Polignano Tour – Visit three authentic villages on a day trip, including Ostuni (known as the “white city”), Alberobello (to see the trulli houses of course), and finally the coastal town of Polignano a Mare to take in glorious coastal views.

By Car

If you’re nearby or prefer the flexibility of driving, Alberobello is easily accessible by car. 

The A14 and SS96 highways connect the town to Bari and other parts of Puglia, and the drive offers beautiful views of rolling hills, olive groves, and vineyards. Expect a smooth drive on the main roads, though be prepared for smaller, winding roads as you approach the town.

Tip: If you’re driving to Alberobello, consider stopping in Locorotondo or Martina Franca on your way – these towns offer charming streets and authentic Puglian experiences. Once you get to Alberobello, the town is small enough to explore on foot, and you’ll likely only need your car to get to the town.

Parking in Alberobello

Finding parking in Alberobello can be tricky, especially near the historic Trulli district. The town center, especially the area around the Rione Monti and Aia Piccola districts, is a Restricted Traffic Zone (ZTL), so be careful not to drive into these areas unless you have a permit.

We parked in a HUGE grassy lot right on the outskirts of town, and while it honestly seemed a little sketch (possibly because we couldn’t figure out if the local man sitting nearby was an attendant or just hanging out…), all was fine. And there were no signs, so…? 

Plus, parking ended up being FREE, which completely threw us off – we’re used to paying for parking in touristy towns! Parking in San Francisco has definitely made us extra cautious about parking in general, haha.

Your best bet is to park on the edges of town or in one of the larger parking lots – it’s easy and hassle-free! Some good options include:

  • Parcheggio Via Caduti di Via Fani: A large parking lot near the entrance to Alberobello, with easy access to the town center.
  • Parcheggio Via Lucana: Located near the old town and a good option if you’re staying in the historic area.
  • Parcheggio Piazza del Popolo: Another option closer to the town center, ideal if you’re exploring on foot.

Parking in Alberobello can be busy, especially during the high season, so it’s a good idea to plan ahead. Once you park, you can easily walk to the main attractions. Since the town is small, you won’t need your car to get around once you’re there.

A Few Tips About Driving in Italy in General 

You’ll need an international driver’s permit: In order to rent a car in Italy as an international tourist, you need to present an International Driver’s Permit. We typically get ours from AAA, and it’s a super easy process (you will need passport photos as well so keep that in mind). Once granted and “activated”, it’s valid for a year.

Rent a small car: There’s no need for a huge car here in Alberobello, and Puglia in general. I actually recommend renting the smallest car possible to make parking easier. We drove around in a small Fiat Panda, and were able to park in small spots and navigate the narrow streets with ease. Psst – Make sure you know how to properly drive a stick if you rent a manual (which is common in Italy and all of Europe).

Beware of local drivers: Italians can be assertive drivers (which we definitely experienced firsthand). Stay alert and be prepared for sudden stops or lane changes. Locals don’t always follow the rules; they don’t stop at stop signs, don’t follow speed limits, and the amount of times we were tailgated was beyond infuriating.

I guess they’re getting annoyed with the increase of tourists… which I totally get. They don’t look, signal, or stop, they just GO. So be extra, extra vigilant and careful. And always let the locals pass you.

If you’re coming from a nearby town, here’s how far Alberobello is:

  • From Locorotondo: ~10 km (6 miles). About 15 minutes by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 15 minutes).
  • From Cisternino: ~20 km (12 miles). About 30 minutes by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 30 minutes).
  • From Bari: ~65 km (40 miles). About 1 hour by car or 1.5 hours by bus; no direct train service, but you can take a train to Martina Franca (about 1 hour), then a short bus ride to Alberobello. 
  • From Polignano a Mare: ~50 km (31 miles). About 45 minutes by car or 1.5 hours by bus; no direct train service, but you can take a train to Monopoli (about 30 minutes), then a bus to your destination.
  • From Matera: ~75 km (47 miles). About 1.5 hours by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 1.5 hours).
  • From Gallipoli: ~130 km (81 miles). About 2 hours by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 2.5 hours).
  • From Otranto: ~150 km (93 miles). About 2.5 to 3 hours by car; no direct train service, but you can take a bus (about 3 hours).
  • From Lecce: ~160 km (99 miles). About 2.5 to 3 hours by car or bus; no direct train service, but you can take a train to Martina Franca (about 1.5 hours), then a short bus ride to your destination.

How to Get Around Alberobello

Getting around Alberobello is super easy – the town is small and walkable, so you can easily explore on foot. Everything is within a short walking distance, so there’s no need for taxis or public transport unless you’re venturing further out. 

Just be prepared for some cobblestone streets and gentle inclines as you explore the town’s historic areas.

Day Trip to Alberobello vs. Staying Overnight

Should you take a day trip to Alberobello or stay overnight? Honestly, if you’re short on time, a day trip is more than enough to experience the magic of this charming town. But just look at our hotel!

While it’s true that Alberobello feels extra special once the day-trippers head out and the town quiets down, there’s not actually a ton to do here, so we were able to get a feel of the place in just a few short hours. The iconic Trulli houses are definitely the highlight, and you can wander the narrow streets and snap all the photos you need without feeling rushed.

That being said, I do think you should spend at least one night on your Puglia road trip in a trulli hotel (doesn’t actually need to be in Alberobello itself)! If you’re looking for a relaxing night, staying overnight nearby in a masseria (like we did near Cisternino) can be a wonderful way to enjoy the Puglia countryside and get a peaceful, authentic experience. 

We stayed in a Trulli-style room at Borgo Canonica, and it was one of the highlights of our trip – a unique stay with beautiful views, but still close enough to Alberobello for a quick visit the next morning. More on our hotel below (psst — we LOVED it).

But don’t worry – day trips are very much possible if you’re already in the nearby region of Puglia! As you can see below, most popular towns/cities in Puglia are only about an hour or so away from Alberobello, meaning if you head there in the early AM, you really have all day to explore!

Taking a day trip to Alberobello like we did? Since Alberobello is one of the most touristy towns in Puglia, you’ll wanna get here on the earlier side to beat the big buses that drop people off in hundreds. 

We parked around 8:30am or so and wandered amongst the trulli for a bit until it got crowded. Then we had some of the best focaccia al pomodoro of our lives at La Lira and promptly left, haha. A few hours was enough for us (plus we had more towns to see!).

Where to Stay in Alberobello

A trullo of course! Yes, you can stay in them!

These traditional stone dwellings, with their conical roofs and charming, rustic architecture, are iconic to the Puglia region in southern Italy. Most trulli have vaulted ceilings, antique furnishings, original stone features, and a private bathroom. Meaning, a super unique stay, and so very different from a typical (dare-I-say-boring) hotel room.

Staying in a Trullo is like stepping back in time. The interiors are typically cozy and rustic, with stone walls and curved ceilings. Modern amenities are often added for comfort, so you’ll find things like air conditioning, modern bathrooms, and kitchenettes in most accommodations, but the charm and old-world feel of the Trulli are preserved.

Note that some Trulli might have air conditioning or portable fans, but older Trulli might rely on natural ventilation or small space heaters, so be sure to check the amenities when booking.

Besides our stunning cave suite in Matera, our trulli masseria near Alberobello was the most unique accommodation I’ve ever stayed in in Italy (and possibly all of Europe)! 

Note that many properties in Alberobello have minimum stays of 2 nights, especially in peak summer season. We originally wanted to stay at Romantic Trulli or Astra right in town, but with only a week in Puglia (plus an additional 2 nights in Matera) and plenty of places we wanted to visit, I just couldn’t make it work to spend 2 nights here in a trulli. 

I do think our one night at Borgo Canonica was enough, although I wouldn’t say no to another few afternoons by the pool. Part masseria, part trulli, it’s truly the best of both worlds (see what I did there, haha). The hotel grounds are stunning, the pool is oh so peaceful, and it was so fun to sleep in a trulli! Plus, there’s free private parking which is always appreciated.

With that being said, there’s plenty of opportunities to spend the night in a trulli outside of Alberobello itself. As noted before, we stayed in a trulli masseria right outside the small village of Cisternino, and loved it.

Here’s a few other options for trulli accommodation in Alberobello:

  • Astra: a luxury trullo with tons of excellent reviews, featuring a perfect blend of modern amenities and traditional charm in the heart of Alberobello
  • Romantic Trulli: a charming and intimate getaway, ideal for couples looking to experience a unique, cozy stay in one of Alberobello’s iconic cone-shaped homes.
  • Tipico Resort: a tranquil retreat with spacious trulli accommodations, providing a peaceful escape surrounded by the stunning landscapes of Puglia
  • Trulli in Corte: offers beautifully restored trulli with a rustic yet comfortable feel, perfect for those who want an authentic, homey experience in the center of Alberobello
  • B&B Trulli Miriva’: combines traditional charm with modern comforts, offering a delightful stay with personalized service and an ideal location
  • Trulli Holiday Albergo Diffuso: a unique “spread-out” hotel experience where guests can stay in beautiful trulli scattered around the town

What to Eat in Alberobello

Alberobello isn’t just about beautiful Trulli – it’s also a fantastic place to eat! The food in this part of Puglia is deliciously simple, focusing on fresh, local ingredients. Here’s a few must-try dishes:

  • Orecchiette: This iconic ear-shaped pasta is a Puglian specialty and a must-try when you’re in Alberobello. It’s often served with a simple sauce like cime di rapa (broccoli rabe) or a hearty tomato-based sauce with meat. You can find it in most local trattorias or restaurants.
  • Panzerotti: Think of it like a savory, deep-fried pocket of dough filled with mozzarella, tomato, and sometimes other fillings like ham or mushrooms. Perfect for a snack while wandering the streets!
  • Focaccia Barese: This soft, olive-oil-rich bread topped with tomatoes, olives, and oregano is a must-try, especially for breakfast or as a snack. It’s available at bakeries around town, and it pairs beautifully with a glass of local wine.

Since we only visited for a few hours (and feasted at our hotel before arriving), we didn’t have too many opportunities for meals in Alberobello. But the one that we did? Simply fantastic. Easily the best focacceria al pomodoro of our lives — head over to La Lira; you won’t be disappointed.

Brief History of Alberobello

Alberobello’s story begins all the way back in the 14th century when it was just a tiny farming village under the rule of the Count of Conversano. 

But what really sets Alberobello apart is its Trulli – those iconic conical-roofed stone houses. Legend has it that the Trulli were built without mortar – a type of paste made from sand, water, and a binder like cement – that would normally be used to hold the stones together. 

The people of Alberobello cleverly stacked the stones without mortar to avoid paying taxes, since the Kingdom of Naples required taxes on permanent structures. So, the Trulli could be easily dismantled, making them technically “temporary” and tax-free.

The town didn’t officially become a proper settlement until the late 16th century when the local ruler, Count Gian Girolamo, allowed it to expand. The Trulli started popping up all over, and by the 18th century, the village was thriving.

In fact, Alberobello’s entire historic center, with its maze of Trulli, was declared a UNESCO World Heritage site in 1996. Today, you can still walk through streets lined with these adorable homes, each with a history of its own.

What’s fascinating is that while Alberobello was once a remote, rural community, it’s now a must-visit destination in Italy. The Trulli have been carefully preserved and restored, and the town has blossomed into a charming place where you can see history come to life. Despite the influx of tourists, it retains its original charm and offers a peek into a way of life that has been around for centuries.

Other FAQs and Info about Alberobello

What’s so special about Alberobello?

Alberobello is one of those places that feels like stepping into a storybook – a town full of picture-perfect conical-roofed houses, the Trulli! These little stone huts, with their quirky roofs, are literally everywhere you look, and there’s something about the way they dot the landscape that feels both ancient and whimsical.

Where can you see trulli? 

Alberobello, a UNESCO World Heritage site, is the heart of the Trulli region and is home to over 1,500 of these structures. There are two main areas in Alberobello where you can find Trulli:

  • Rione Monti: The larger of the two neighborhoods, this area is full of Trulli and gives you a chance to stay right in the heart of the UNESCO-listed town. This is the area we primarily explored!
  • Rione Aia Piccola: A quieter, less touristy area, where you can experience the Trulli in a more residential setting. If you’re exploring over here, please be respectful of the locals and remember – people still live here!

In addition to Alberobello, the nearby towns of Locorotondo and Martina Franca also feature Trulli, though on a smaller scale.

Is Alberobello really that touristy?

Haha, yup! As someone who’s traveled all over Italy, I can tell you that Alberobello definitely gets its fair share of tourists, but that doesn’t mean it’s lost its charm. It’s a UNESCO World Heritage site after all, so it attracts visitors, especially during the summer months. 

The Trulli houses are iconic, and you’ll find crowds around the most famous areas like Rione Monti – the district packed with those adorable conical-roofed homes.

However, here’s the thing: it’s touristy in the best way. While some parts of Alberobello do feel like a tourist destination (hello, souvenir shops!), the town still feels authentic. 

You can easily wander off the main streets and discover quieter, less commercialized corners of the town, especially in the Rione Aia Piccola district. It’s here that you’ll see locals living their lives among the Trulli, which is what makes Alberobello so magical. 

So yes, it’s touristy – but not to the point where it takes away from the town’s charm. You can still find those quiet moments to feel like you’re stepping back in time.

Currency in Alberobello

Like the rest of Italy, the currency in Alberobello is the Euro (€). Credit cards are widely accepted, especially in larger shops, restaurants, and hotels. However, for those little family-owned trattorias or quirky cafes tucked away in quieter corners, it’s always a good idea to carry a bit of cash. Plus, cash is the easiest option for souvenirs. 

If you’re not sure where the nearest ATM is, don’t worry – Alberobello has several, and you’ll find them near the main tourist areas.

Language in Alberobello

The main language spoken in Alberobello is Italian, of course. While it’s always great to brush up on some basic Italian phrases (and believe me, locals really appreciate it when you try), you’ll find that many people in the more touristy areas speak at least a little English. Still, don’t expect everyone to be fluent, especially in smaller cafes or shops.

A few phrases to remember:

  • Ciao! – Hello!
  • Per favore – Please
  • Grazie – Thank you
  • Quanto costa? – How much does it cost?
  • Parla inglese? – Do you speak English?

If you’re staying in one of the Trulli or venturing into the surrounding countryside, you may even hear a bit of the local Apulian dialect, but don’t worry – it’s similar enough to standard Italian that you’ll still get by!

Things to do in Alberobello

Looking for things to do in Alberobello?! You’re in the right place. There’s honestly not a ton to do here besides strolling around the UNESCO World Heritage Site, but enough to fill a morning and/or an afternoon. 

And to be completely honest, Alberobello definitely feels like a tourist trap in Puglia (easily…), but still a must-see in my opinion (just arrive early!). Just don’t plan to spend multiple days here. 

1. Wander through the trulli districts

Of course one of the most popular things to do in Alberobello is to simply wander among all the trulli! That’s the main appeal of visiting the town of course, and what makes this spot so different from others on any Puglia itinerary.

The town is divided into two main districts – Rione Monti and Rione Aia Piccola. Rione Monti is the more touristy area (with the highest concentration of trulli); this is where many trulli have been converted into shops, cafes, and accommodations. 

Rione Aia Piccola is a smaller but less touristy area of trulli — it’s much quieter and has a more residential feel. Note that some of the houses are still inhabited, so always make sure to be extra respectful and avoid disturbing the residents (including staying off private property).

But regardless where you wander, you’re sure to come across all the quirky, conical roofs – there’s tons of them over here. There’s something so magical about the way the light hits the whitewashed stone, and my husband had to literally pry my camera outta my hands, haha.

2. Take a guided tour

If you’d rather wander around with a local guide and actually learn a thing or two (highly recommended), consider signing up for this 2-hour guided trulli tour. I think our visit would have had a lot more meaning if we understood the history and significance.

On this guided sightseeing tour with a local (whose family had lived in Alberobello for many generations and even lived in one of the Trulli in town), you’ll learn all about and admire the architecture of the city’s unique trulli buildings, marvel at panoramic views of the city, visit a typical Trullo church, and even head inside a trullo. Doesn’t get more meaningful than that!

3. Find the best viewpoints

Of course, wandering the town at ground level is great, but if you’re looking for breathtaking views, make sure you head up to one of the panoramic terraces. You can look over the town’s rooftops and really see the conical roofs that make these trulli truly unique!

Alberobello offers plenty of stunning views, and to find the best spots, keep an eye out for signs that say “Vista Panoramica.” These will lead you to terraces and rooftops with sweeping views of the town and its iconic trulli. 

Just remember, to access the roofs you’ll need to buy something from the shop, typically a coffee or a small souvenir. From these vantage points, you can take in the sight of the conical roofs spread across the landscape, framed by olive groves and rolling hills. STUNNING.

4. Admire the view from Trulli Panoramic View

With that being said, if you’re looking for the absolute best view in town, you have to head to Trulli Panoramic View. It’s located right in the heart of Alberobello and offers stunning panoramic views of the Trulli district and the surrounding countryside. By far the best view of the historical part of the town. 

We started our day in Alberobello here, and LOVED the morning light over the whitewashed rooftops – I honestly kinda wish we had come for sunrise!

It’s the perfect spot to take in the entire layout of the town and snap a few photos from above. It’s one of the most popular things to do in Alberobello, so I highly recommend heading here first thing since there’ll be fewer tourists and more space to take it all in.

5. See the Church of Sant’Antonio

I was so surprised to learn that there’s actually a church built in the shape of a Trullo! The Church of Sant’Antonio is a stunning example of how the Trulli architecture has influenced other parts of Alberobello. This 20th-century church, located in Rione Monti, is one of the highlights of the town, with its beautiful stonework and unique conical roof. 

It’s a peaceful place to take a moment and reflect, and the church is still very much in use for services, so you might get lucky and experience the serene atmosphere during a Mass. It was one of those quiet moments that felt like I was experiencing a true blend of local tradition and spirituality at the same time.

6. Explore the Local Shops

Alberobello is filled with quaint little shops selling everything from handmade ceramics to local olive oils and artisan wines. I spent an hour or so popping in and out of these adorable stores, picking up unique souvenirs to take home (of course I grabbed myself a cute postcard like I always do!). 

And since the trulli are the main appeal of town, of course the souvenirs reflect that. I saw so many mini trulli-themed souvenirs, ranging from mini trulli models to decorative items like magnets, postcards, and keychains. There’s also plenty of wooden crafts, artisan-made jewelry, woven textiles, and local food products like local olive oil, taralli (traditional Italian snack crackers), pasta, cheese, and wine thrown into the mix.

7. Relax at the Parco dei Trulli

After a few hours of sightseeing, you’ll want to find a nice spot to relax, and the Parco dei Trulli is the perfect place. This peaceful park is just a short walk from the town center, and it’s great for unwinding after all the wandering. The park is dotted with small Trulli, which makes it feel like you’re still in the heart of the historic district, but it’s a lot quieter and more relaxing. 

We unfortunately didn’t make it here as we had other towns in the Itria Valley to check out, but if you’ve got more time, definitely add this to your list.

8. Check Out the Trulli Museum (Trullo Sovrano)

A quick stop at the Trulli Museum (also known as the Trullo Sovrano) is a great way to learn about the history and significance of these iconic homes. And to learn more about the construction techniques of these fascinating structures. 

The museum is small but incredibly informative – perfect if you want to understand the history behind how the Trulli were built without mortar (yes, no glue or cement keeping the building together – which I found just wild!). 

The exhibits are really well curated, and they dive into the unique dry-stone building technique that makes these structures so durable and distinctive. I found it fascinating to learn how the Trulli evolved from simple farming homes to the architectural marvels that they are today. It’s definitely worth a visit if you’re a history buff or just curious about the building techniques!

9. Take a tuk-tuk tour of Alberobello

A tuk tuk tour of Alberobello is a fun and breezy way to explore the town, where you can zip around in a colorful three-wheeled vehicle and take in the sights, especially the iconic Trulli houses of course. These tuk tuks, called Apes in Italy, can be found all throughout the Puglia region. We also saw them all over Matera!

The tours are led by friendly local drivers who share all kinds of interesting facts about the history and architecture of the town while you cruise through its charming streets. It’s a great way to cover more ground without having to walk under the hot summer sun. This tour even goes to the surrounding countryside to see some rural examples of trulli architecture.

You’ll be given time to stop and take photos, enjoy panoramic views, see the basilica, Sant’Antonio Church, and Trullo Sovrano. And even into a family’s home in a trullo – something you don’t get to do just wandering around yourself! It’s a great way to discover the history of the Trulli and of Alberobello without melting in the sun.

I didn’t end up taking the tuk tuk tour during my visit, but honestly, I kind of wish I had! I kept seeing the little vehicles whizzing around, and it looked like such a fun way to get around and see the town from a different perspective. Plus, I had already walked 20k steps a few days in a row, so my feet would have definitely appreciated the rest, haha. Something for me to consider next time!

10. Take a food walking tour

Food in Puglia is next level, and Alberobello is no exception. Because of this, a food tour is easily one of the best things to do in Alberobello. I mean, this is Italy we’re talking about – of course the food’s gonna be amazing!  

While I unfortunately discovered this tour a little too late in my trip, it looks absolutely spectacular and is definitely on my list for next time! A food tour is the perfect way to dive into the flavors of Puglia and experience the region’s culinary traditions firsthand. And plus, you get to fill up on burrata, focaccia, and gelato – what could be better?!

On a food tour in Alberobello, you’ll also learn about the region’s famous olive oils and wines – Puglia is known for producing some of the best in Italy! And of course eat plenty of cheese… because why not?!

11. Learn how to make pasta and tiramisu

Wanna learn how to make your own pasta and tiramisu?! Alberobello’s the place to do it! I love taking cooking classes when I travel (I’ve made macarons in Paris, egg tarts in Lisbon, pizza in Rome, tamales in Mexico, and tiramisu in Florence), and they’re always such great ways to really immerse yourself in the culture. Plus, you get to eat what you cook afterwards, soo…. If you have the time, I’d definitely say yes to a cooking class. 

In this pasta making class, you’ll learn how to roll ‘sfoglia’ (fresh pasta) by hand and how to prepare 2 simple different kinds of pasta from scratch. And of course how to prepare the iconic Tiramisu, all in a local home in Alberobello. You know it’s gonna be fresh when most of the ingredients are home grown by the family! There’s a reason the cooking class got such great reviews. I’d kill for some fresh pasta right about now!

12. Take a day trip to surrounding villages

While Alberobello is absolutely worth spending a few hours in, if you have the time, I highly recommend exploring the surrounding Valle d’Itria. This area is known for its vineyards, olive groves, and other beautiful hilltop towns like Locorotondo, Martina Franca, and Cisternino.

Locorotondo, with its charming circular old town, and Cisternino, known for its beautiful historic center and delicious grilled meats, are just a short drive away and are very different from Alberobello. We loved both of these other hilltop towns, and actually visited both on the same day as Alberobello during our week in Puglia.

If you’re in the mood for a longer day trip, you can also stop by nearby Martina Franca, with its baroque architecture and quaint streets. I’m still sad we missed this (as I’ve heard really good things), but just another reason for us to come back to Puglia!

Alberobello’s not far from other towns in Puglia as well, including Polignano a Mare and Monopoli — two favorites of ours!

Hope that helps you plan out your day trip to Alberobello, and give you an idea of all the fun things to do in Alberobello as well! Are you visiting Puglia anytime soon?!



The post Day Trip to Alberobello: Things to do in Alberobello and Full Trulli Guide appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/day-trip-to-alberobello-puglia/feed/ 0
One Day in Matera Itinerary: Italy’s Breathtaking Sassi Escape https://apassionandapassport.com/things-to-do-in-matera-itinerary/ https://apassionandapassport.com/things-to-do-in-matera-itinerary/#respond Mon, 18 Nov 2024 06:42:25 +0000 https://apassionandapassport.com/?p=31800 Headed to Southern Italy and planning to spend just one day in Matera? Follow this one day Matera itinerary to explore the stunning Sassi cave dwellings, indulge in local cuisine, and take in breathtaking views — all with tons of history! All my favorite things to do in Matera, coming right up! The moment weContinue Reading

The post One Day in Matera Itinerary: Italy’s Breathtaking Sassi Escape appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
Headed to Southern Italy and planning to spend just one day in Matera? Follow this one day Matera itinerary to explore the stunning Sassi cave dwellings, indulge in local cuisine, and take in breathtaking views — all with tons of history! All my favorite things to do in Matera, coming right up!

The moment we arrived at our hotel in Matera (after lugging our bags a few too many blocks… more on that later), WHOA just WHOA. We truly felt like we entered another world. I could not take my eyes off of that view (which, spoiler alert, ended up being one of my favorite things to do in Matera, haha). Yes, stare at the views!

So what’s so special about Matera anyways? Well, it’s one of Italy’s most unique destinations, and actually the oldest city in the entire country, dating back over 9,000 years. Yes, you read that right – Matera has been continuously inhabited since 7,000 years before Christ (let that sink in for a bit)! 

Plus, it’s a UNESCO World Heritage site, the 2019 European Capital of Culture, AND the third-oldest city in the world (after Aleppo and Jericho), so yeah, it’s got a lot going for it.

Matera’s ancient, incredibly unique, and steeped in history. Plus it’s absolutely GORGEOUS – those views are unlike anything I’ve ever seen. The entire city feels like a time capsule, with narrow winding streets, stone buildings, and labyrinth-like staircases at every turn. And of course, Matera’s most famous for its ancient cave dwellings known as “Sassi” — a true highlight on any one day Matera itinerary. 

To be completely honest, I hadn’t even heard of this extraordinary ancient cave city until a few years ago when I first started seeing it on social media. And when I realized just how close Matera is to the Puglia region, I promptly added it onto our Puglia road trip (which is now one of my new favorite regions in Europe). If you’re already planning to visit Puglia, I highly recommend you do the same if you have the time! 

And yes, you really can see so much with just one day in Matera – I promise! The city’s the perfect compact size to explore for those with a short amount of time. Just note that there’s tons and tons of stone stairs (I mean, Sassi literally means rock in Italian, haha), so pace yourself and get ready for a bit of a workout. We were tired after just a few hours in the scorching summer sun!

Honestly, the mix of ancient history, stunning views, and a lively cultural scene makes Matera such a cool place to visit if you want to see a different side of Italy. With its rich cultural heritage, captivating rock churches, and mouthwatering local cuisine, Matera is a place you won’t forget anytime soon. We’re still talking about it months later!

One Day in Matera Logistics 

Before we get into all the fun things to do in Matera and my recommended one day Matera itinerary, there’s a lot of logistics to talk about first!

Where is Matera?

First of all, where is Matera exactly?! Psst – before doing research for my Italy trip, I honestly had no idea, so don’t feel bad if you haven’t got a clue either, lol.

Now I know that Matera’s nestled in the Basilicata region of southern Italy, right in a ravine carved by the Gravina River. And that river has shaped some seriously stunning cliffs and gorges over thousands of years – once you see it, you’ll see just how remarkable it really is. It’s actually kinda remote nestled deep in the mountainsides, but dontcha worry – it’s hardly a hidden gem anymore, haha.

Even though Matera is technically in Basilicata, it’s super close to Puglia, so plenty of people combine it with a road trip through Puglia – us included! You can soak in Matera’s ancient vibes and then hop over to Puglia for some amazing local food and culture, or vice versa. 

Italy is a long and narrow country, so don’t expect to be able to hop on over to Matera regardless of where you are in the country! For reference, Matera is 400+ km from Rome, 650+ km from Florence, and 850 km from Venice. Yup — definitely not possible to visit Matera for a day from one of these cities! Maybeeee just maybe from Naples (~250 km away), but only if you’re prepared for a super long day and there’s zero traffic. 

Here are some specific distances to nearby cities: 

  • Altamura and Gravina in Puglia: each ~20-30 kilometers (12-18 miles) away
  • Castelmezzano and Pietrapertosa: ~40 kilometers (25 miles) northwest
  • Bari: ~65 kilometers (40 miles) to the northeast
  • Alberobello: ~70 kilometers (43 miles) to the southeast
  • Naples: ~250 kilometers (155 miles) to the west

Geographically, Matera features stunning limestone cliffs and a rugged landscape that really define the town. It’s famous for its Sassi – those unique stone houses carved directly into the rock. The views of the surrounding valleys and ravines are breathtaking, and we totally felt like we stepped into a living history book. I couldn’t get enough of the scenery here – it was just so striking and one-of-a-kind!

When to Plan Your Matera Itinerary

Like much of Italy, Matera has four distinct seasons. Each season brings its own appeal, so whether you’re into sunny days or the cozy atmosphere of cooler months, there’s a perfect time for you to explore this amazing city.

Spring (March to May): This is one of the best times to visit Matera. The weather is mild, with temperatures ranging from the low 50s to mid-70s°F (10-25°C), the flowers are blooming, and the crowds are still manageable. The Matera Film Festival takes place in May, so it’s a super fun time to visit if you’re interested in celebrating the cinema!

Summer (June to August): It’s peak tourist season in Matera, meaning it’s the most crowded time of year. And we felt it, haha. Even though Puglia was relatively less crowded overall in early June (compared to other spots we’ve previously visited in Europe), Matera was just not, haha. It was by far the most crowded place on our Puglia road trip. 

However, if you wake up early you may very well have the sassi to yourself. It seems as if the city kinda wakes up late, but that may just be since all the day trippers haven’t arrived just yet.

Plus, summers in Matera can get brutally hot (like miserably scorching), with temperatures often exceeding 85°F (30°C). And it’s really hard to escape the heat since the caves reflect the sun pretty harshly. After just a few minutes we were longing for some shade and craving a cold drink, haha. I was dripping about 85% of the time — not a pretty look, oh well!

I definitely recommend wandering around at night once the temp cools off and the daytrippers go home.

Psst – Festa della Madonna della Bruna which honors the patron saint of Matera is on July 2, so expect TONS of crowds then. I’d specifically avoid that week if you can. 

Fall (September to November): Another fantastic time to visit, fall brings cooler temperatures and fewer tourists (although September is still kinda hot and crowded). Daytime highs are typically in the 70s°F (20-25°C), making it comfortable for exploring. Plus, there’s some autumn colors and harvest festivals this time of year.

Winter (December to February): Winters are mild but can be chilly, with temperatures averaging in the 40s°F (4-9°C). Snow is rare but possible, which can make the city look even more magical than it already is! 

Besides Christmas week, this is the quietest time for tourism, so there’ll be way less crowds and you can probably snag a good deal on special cave hotels! Just be sure to bundle up when you’re out and about exploring – just because this is Italy doesn’t mean it doesn’t get chilly!

How to Get to Matera

By Plane

If you’re not already in Italy, you’ll need to get there of course! Thankfully, there’s an airport not too far away – the closest “major” airport is Bari Karol Wojtyła Airport (BRI), about 65 km/40 miles from Matera. I put “major” in quotes since major is all relative – meaning you won’t be able to fly directly here from the US. Connecting in Rome, Naples, or Milan will be your best bet!

Once you get to BRI, you can rent a car (recommended if you’re off on a longer Puglia road trip like we were), take a shuttle bus to Bari city center and then catch a train or bus to Matera, or take an expensive taxi ride (for a more direct option).

Other nearby airports include Brindisi Airport – BDS (145 km away) and Naples – NAP (250 km away), but Bari is by far the closest. Note that in order to get to Matera from BDS or NAP by public transit you’ll most likely need to transfer in Bari anyways.

By Train

Getting to Matera by train is possible, but always involves a combo of train and bus since Matera doesn’t have its own train station (I was super surprised by this!).

Regardless of where you’re coming from (Bari, Naples, Rome, etc), you’ll need to transfer at Ferrandina (the nearest train station to Matera, about 20 km away). And once you get to Ferrandina, it’s pretty straight forward – there’s regional buses (Ferrovie Appulo Lucane FAL) that’ll take you straight to Matera in about 30 minutes. 

By Bus

If you don’t wanna deal with transferring at Ferrandina, you can take a direct bus to Matera instead! There’s a few different companies who have routes from several cities in Italy (including Bari, Naples, and Potenza) –  check out FlixBus, MarinoBus, and Ferrovie Appulo Lucane (FAL).

To give you a general idea, from Bari, expect the bus to take ~1.5 hours or so, from Naples about 4 hours, and from Rome about 6.5 hours.

And if you’d rather make it super, super easy and only have time for one day in Matera, definitely consider an organized tour. This day trip to Matera leaves from both Polignano a Mare and Bari, and means you don’t have to worry about transportation (or parking!) at all!

By Car

Nearby? Of course you can drive to Matera! And you’ll get to go through the beautiful landscapes of Basilicata (and Puglia, depending where you’re coming from) –  expect to see rolling hills, lovely vineyards, and quaint olive groves. The region is famous for its stunning scenery afterall! 

Major roads, such as the A14 and SS96, are generally well-maintained. However, be prepared for some smaller, winding roads as you approach Matera, particularly if you take scenic routes or detours.

Psst – if you’re driving to Matera, I highly recommend stopping in both Gravina in Puglia (to see the iconic bridge) and Altamura (for their famous bread) either before or after your few days in Matera. We made brief stops in both of these and loved them!

Note that the center of Matera is a Restricted Traffic Zone (ZTL), meaning driving and parking in this area is restricted. And once you start wandering around, you’ll see exactly why — cars just don’t work here, haha.

Parking in Matera

Parking in Matera is kinda a nightmare. You’ll need to stick to the newer part of the city and make sure to avoid the ZTL. There’s lots of (paid) street-parking and several parking lots (“Parcheggio”), but we found it quite difficult to find a spot. We maneuvered into the first spot we saw (on the outskirts of the Sassi), paid for street parking for the entire duration of our time in Matera, and then didn’t move the car until we were ready to leave the city for good. 

It was beyond busy and we were too worried we wouldn’t find another spot. Plus, once you get to Matera you don’t really need a car to get around anyways.

I recommend pinning a few parking lots in advance so if you can’t find street parking, you have a few stress-free options. There’s Car Park Via Lanera (recommended, although check the timetables of “Linea Circolare Lanera”), Car Park Piazza Cesare Firrao, Car Park Piazza Kennedy Via Cappelluti, Carpark Via Lucana, and Carpark Parcheggio di Piazza Bianco. Lots of options, but still very busy.

A few tips about driving in Italy in general:

You’ll need an international driver’s permit: In order to rent a car in Italy as an international tourist, you need to present an International Driver’s Permit. We typically get ours from AAA, and it’s a super easy process (you will need passport photos as well so keep that in mind). Once granted and “activated”, it’s valid for a year. 

Rent a small car: There’s no need for a huge car here in Matera. I recommend renting the smallest car possible to make parking easier. We drove around in a small Fiat Panda, and were able to park in small spots and navigate the narrow streets with ease. Psst – Make sure you know how to properly drive stick if you rent a manual (which is common in Italy and all of Europe).

Beware of local drivers: Italians can be assertive drivers (which we definitely experienced firsthand). Stay alert and be prepared for sudden stops or lane changes. Locals don’t always follow the rules; they don’t stop at stop signs, don’t follow speed limits, and the amount of times we were tailgated was beyond infuriating.

I guess they’re getting annoyed with the increase of tourists… which I totally get. They don’t look, signal, or stop, they just GO. So be extra, extra vigilant and careful. And always let the locals pass you.

How to Get Around Matera

On Foot: Walking is really the best way to get around Matera, especially in the historic center (Sassi). Note that the narrow, cobbled streets are steep and winding, so be sure to wear your comfiest non-slip shoes and bring along plenty of water! I swear we walked at least 20k steps a day, and our legs were so sore the next morning (because of all the steep streets and unfathomable amount of stairs). 

I’m not sure if it’s just us, but we found the Sassi so confusing to walk around, haha. The Sassi is literally a series of winding cobblestone sideways and alleys up and down caves, so kinda to be expected.

At some points in the day we had enough, especially since it was super hot and hilly (with no sea to jump into!). That’s when we decided it was time for a drink and snack break, haha. It was kinda frustrating being there in peak summer with zero shade and nowhere to cool off, but we persevered and kept exploring, fueled by gelato and the occasional break in the shade of a cave.

Accessibility in Matera: The historic area of Matera can be challenging for those with mobility issues due to the steep and uneven paths. And SO. MANY. STAIRS. This area of Matera is definitely not stroller friendly (use a baby carrier instead), but the newer area is much easier to navigate for those using a wheelchair or mobility scooter, or pushing a stroller.

Sightseeing Bus Tour: Don’t worry if you aren’t comfortable with all the steps — there’s an open-top sightseeing bus tour! To be completely honest, I kinda wish we took a bus tour. After walking around for hours (and getting lost a few too many times), we were beyond frustrated when we couldn’t find something on my map (the Sassi is tricky!). A bus tour surely would have saved our feet and thighs and butts. Plus, I wouldn’t be dripping with sweat for the duration of the day, haha.

Ape tour: Another fun way to explore the Sassi is by hopping on an Ape Calessino (tuk-tuk) tour! In Italian, they’re called ape cars (ah-peh), which means bee – how cute! While they can’t navigate every street (some are too narrow and reserved for pedestrians), most tours (like this one!) cover all the main attractions, and even give you time for photo breaks. It’s a great way to get to know the city, get off your feet, and learn a thing or two from a local.

Day trip to Matera vs Overnight

Should you take a day trip to Matera or stay overnight? That really depends how much time you have.

But if you can swing it, I HIGHLY recommend spending at least one night in Matera. Why? So you can experience sleeping in a cave! We loved our boutique cave hotel – probably one of the most unique accommodation experiences we’ve had to date (besides living the luxury life in an overwater bungalow in Bora Bora, a luxury safari lodge in Tanzania, and a Bedouin camp in Israel).

Plus, the real magic happens after hours, when the evenings are quiet, the streets are less crowded, and the caves are beautifully illuminated. Staying overnight allows you to truly soak in Matera’s unique charm. And sunset over the caves?! Absolutely nothing like it – I couldn’t peel my eyes away (just ask my husband, haha).

After spending a week in Puglia, we drove over to Matera and spent two nights here – and it was the perfect amount of time. We arrived just before sunset our first evening, and then had the entire next day and night to explore, before leaving for Bari the following morning. Our full day was a good mix of sightseeing and exploring the Sassi with lots of snack and drink breaks.

But don’t worry – day trips are very much possible if you’re already in the nearby region of Puglia! As you can see below, most popular towns/cities in Puglia are only about an hour or so away from Matera, meaning if you head there in the early AM, you really have all day to explore!

I do think an organized day trip from Polignano a Mare or Bari is the way to go if you’re staying in one of these areas. Why complicate things?! You’re on vacation!

  • From Bari: ~65 km (40 miles). ~1.5 hours by car or 2 hours by bus; ~1.5 hours by train to Ferrandina, then a short bus ride to Matera.
  • From Polignano a Mare: ~50 km (31 miles). ~1 hour by car or 1.5 hours by bus; no direct train service.
  • From Alberobello: ~35 km (22 miles). ~45 minutes by car or 1 hour by bus; no direct train service.
  • From Gallipoli: ~130 km (81 miles). ~2.5 hours by car; no direct train service; consider a bus.
  • From Otranto: ~150 km (93 miles). ~2.5 to 3 hours by car; no direct train service.
  • From Lecce: ~160 km (99 miles). ~2.5 to 3 hours by car or bus; ~2.5 hours by train to Ferrandina, then a short bus ride to Matera.

Where to Stay in Matera

As mentioned before, if you have the time, I highly recommend spending at least one night in Matera, preferably two! 

And definitely sleep in a boutique cave hotel during your time in Matera. I mean, what a unique experience (kinda like spending a night in a trulli in Alberobello)! The cave hotels are often set right within the ancient Sassi, the iconic cave dwellings carved into the rock. Think exposed stone walls, private terraces, hot tubs, and/or spa facilities!

There’s plenty of luxury options (what we opted for), with a blend of ancient charm and modern comfort. Just remember – these caves had been inhabited for thousands of years before being converted into hotels/accommodation, whoa! 

Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel: This is where we stayed, and WHOA! After doing tons of research, we ultimately chose to spend 2 nights at Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel, and what a fantastic choice that was. The hotel was newly opened in 2018, and located right in the center of the Sassi on a ridge by the Sasso Caveoso district. I’m honestly not sure if we got upgraded (the room we got was way bigger than what we thought we booked), but hey, no complaints there! Just look at it – we literally showered (and went to the bathroom) in a cave!

We feasted on huge breakfast buffets each and every morning, the service was top-notch, and the views straight from the hotel were some of the best we found in all of Matera. Plus, Aquatio boasts an insane spa (and wellness center) in a beautifully lit cave that we definitely took advantage of, haha. Book early as there’s only 35 rooms and suites (and they do sell out in summer)!

If Aquatio Cave Luxury Hotel is sold out or not within budget, here’s some other popular cave hotels in Matera:

I do want you to consider that you’ll likely be dragging your luggage up and down stairs to your hotel in the Sassi (although some hotels offer valet service). So choose a hotel wisely – we ended up walking 15 minutes or so to our hotel (we had a hard time finding a parking spot nearby), but thankfully most of the walk was through the newer part of Matera which is mostly flat.

What to Eat in Matera

Cuisine in Matera is simple and nourishing, characterized by the most easily available foods such as bread and pasta. Since this is a region rich in agricultural produce (just look at those tomatoes growing right in town!), it reflects the local flavors and traditions.

We didn’t make any restaurant reservations while planning our Matera itinerary, and I instantly regretted that mistake as soon as we arrived. As mentioned earlier, Matera was insanely crowded during our visit. Everything we ate was absolutely delicious though – I don’t think you can have a bad meal.

Here’s a few dishes and specific foods to try: 

  • Pane di Matera: traditional bread made from special wheat that has a distinct flavor
  • Cialledda: local bread salad with fresh veggies, herbs, and sometimes beans (great for a refreshing lunch)
  • Orecchiette: an ear-shaped pasta that’s a regional favorite, often served with a simple sauce made from turnip tops (cime di rapa) or a tasty tomato sauce
  • Peperoni Cruschi: crispy, dried peppers that are a great snack or add a flavorful kick to dishes
  • Burrata: creamy cheese great with fresh with local tomatoes and a drizzle of olive oil (although more famous in Puglia)
  • Agnello al Forno: slow-roasted lamb seasoned with local herbs and spices (super hearty and satisfying)
  • Pignata: a traditional super flavorful stew made with meat and vegetables, slow-cooked in a clay pot
  • Fave e Cicoria: a simple classic dish featuring pureed fava beans served with sautéed chicory
  • Focaccia: soft and flavorful flatbread often topped with herbs, olives, or tomatoes

Brief History of Matera

This wouldn’t be a complete Matera itinerary without touching upon its rich and complex history! I mean, human settlement in the area traces back to the Paleolithic era! Over the centuries, Matera has seen a whirlwind of cultural influences, especially from the Romans and Byzantines, which have really shaped its one-of-a-kind character.

The Sassi, those incredible ancient cave dwellings, popped up as a clever solution for housing in the rocky landscape. Carved directly into the stone, these structures create a fascinating labyrinth of homes, churches, and public spaces that tell the amazing story of life in Matera throughout the ages.

In the 20th century, the Sassi gained a reputation for their tough living conditions, especially after World War II, which led to many residents having to relocate due to overcrowding and sanitation issues, causing feelings of abandonment and a major drop in the area’s population. It’s wild to think that people lived in these caves without electricity or running water as recently as the 1950s!. 

But here’s the good news: restoration efforts kicked off in the 1980s, and by 1993, the Sassi were designated a UNESCO World Heritage site! This was a real turning point for their preservation and revitalization.

Matera really hit the spotlight when it was named a European Capital of Culture in 2019, drawing in international attention and investment. This initiative sparked a vibrant arts scene, with trendy cafes and boutiques popping up right alongside traditional crafts. Its stunning landscapes and unique architecture have even turned it into a favorite spot for filmmakers – you might recognize it from hits like “The Passion of the Christ” and “No Time to Die”!

Today, Matera is a captivating mix of ancient history and modern culture. It’s some place I really think everyone should visit, even if it’s just for a day!

Other FAQs and Info About Matera

  • What’s so special about Matera? I mean, just look at the photos! Matera is famous for its ancient cave dwellings, the Sassi, which are among the oldest continuously inhabited settlements in the world and are recognized as a UNESCO World Heritage Site. Plus, the city has stunning landscapes, a rich history, and vibrant culture. It’s seriously like nowhere else I’ve been before (although I have a feeling Cappadocia in Turkey is somewhat similar).
  • Is Matera worth visiting? 1000% yes! Just prepare for lots and lots of stairs (comfy shoes help!), and take breaks when you need to get outta the hot summer sun. It’s super, super unique, so way different from other spots in Italy and the Mediterranean you’ve been. 
  • Is Matera expensive? Depending where you stay, it certainly can be. Our luxury cave hotel was the most expensive place we stayed on our entire Puglia road trip, but there’s certainly cheaper accommodation. We found meals and activities to be pretty good value, and we honestly kinda just wandered around during the day (meaning we didn’t spend much besides food and hotel).
  • Currency in Matera: Like the rest of Italy, Matera uses the Euro (€) as its official currency. ATMs are widely available, and credit and debit cards are accepted in most shops and restaurants, though it’s always a good idea to have some cash on hand for smaller establishments or markets.
  • Language in Matera: The official language spoken in Matera is Italian. However, you might also hear local dialects, particularly “Lucano,” which reflects the region’s unique cultural heritage. English is spoken in many tourist areas, but locals really appreciate it when you at least attempt basic Italian phrases.

Historic Sassi vs. Matera’s Modern City

Matera is divided into two distinct areas: the Sassi (the old part) and the modern city. And you’ll be able to tell the difference straight away, as they look entirely different, haha. There’s no way not to notice the contrast. Here’s a quick breakdown of them both:

Old Matera (Sassi)

The Sassi di Matera is an absolute must-see, and what makes Matera oh so unique! This UNESCO World Heritage Site is famous for its ancient cave dwellings and rock churches, some dating back thousands of years. Picture narrow alleys and winding streets lined with stunning limestone buildings carved right into the rock – it’s like stepping back in time.

But it’s not just about the sights; you get a real taste of local life here. Many cave houses are still occupied, and you’ll find charming artisan shops, cozy restaurants, and historical sites around every corner. It’s a cultural experience that truly immerses you in the heart of Matera!

New Matera (Modern City)

Something I didn’t realize before spending one day in Matera? That there’s a modern side of Matera as well! This newer side of Matera is called the Piano, and it’s just like any chic little city you’d find elsewhere in Italy, complete with sleek architecture, trendy shops, and a range of hotels and restaurants.

It’s got a much more common city layout, and way less steps and steep hills to climb. Although there’s no caves… so make sure you in fact don’t spend all your time here in modern Matera, haha. This area is definitely alive with energy though – there was actually a half marathon taking place throughout the streets when we visited (something we definitely didn’t expect!).

Most people who live in Matera live here in the Piano, where the Italian government relocated the residents of the Sassi to in the early 1950s.

So let’s get started with our day trip to Matera — full of all the iconic, historic spots in the city and breathtaking views at every turn. The perfect one day in Matera itinerary, coming right up!

One Day in Matera Itinerary

Tips to Maximize Your Matera Itinerary 

  • Start early! If you’re spending the night in the city before your one day in Matera, wake up and get out exploring at a reasonable hour! If you’re driving over as part of a much-longer Puglia road trip, set your alarm so you get to Matera before 10am (preferably earlier).
  • Craft your one day in Matera itinerary ahead of time. With such a short amount of time, don’t get to Matera without a plan. I of course recommend prioritizing visits to the iconic attractions (the Sassi di Matera, the Cave Churches, Piazza del Duomo, etc). However, the entire city is like a maze with unique architecture at every turn, so if you’re not fussed about seeing certain spots, you can honestly just wander around and take it all in.
  • Pay for parking if need be. Driving? If you’ve only got 24 hours in Matera (or less if you’re doing a day trip), you don’t wanna spend half your day looking for parking. Yes, paying for parking sucks (I get it — I’d rather save that cash for vino and gelato), but sometimes you just gotta suck it up. Time is money, people! Look for garages in advance and plan to park your car there the whole day.
  • Plan out your food stops in advance. It’s hard to have a bad meal in Matera (this is Italy afterall!), but if you’re an indecisive person like me, the choices may overwhelm you. Do your research ahead of time so you don’t waste time deciding where to eat. Plus, if you’re visiting in high season (June through August/September), make some dinner reservations if there’s a specific spot you wanna eat at!
  • Consider a guided tour. Really wanna make the most of your time and learn tons about Matera in just one day? Walking tours and ape tuk-tuk tours are fantastic for this purpose, as you can typically see more in less time and get tons of info from a local guide! 

And finally, here’s how I’d spend one day in Matera!

Morning in Matera: Explore the Sassi

Wake up (hopefully in your epic cave hotel), and you’ll immediately feel the magic of Matera. Our hotel had such a fantastic view I could’ve been content simply staring out a few feet from our accommodation, haha. But of course, we had a whole city to discover! After enjoying the gorgeous breakfast spread from our hotel, we set off to explore. 

The city is known for its cave dwellings, and they’ve got some wild stories to tell. I recommend taking the morning to simply wander through the streets of the Sassi. We felt like we were walking in an open air museum, and loved getting lost in the meandering alleyways (although to be honest, we actually got lost a few too many times, haha).

These unique structures, carved right into the limestone, date back thousands of years and are actually a UNESCO World Heritage site. The Sassi di Matera is made up of two districts – Sasso Barisano and Sasso Caveoso – where you can just wander the narrow alleys and stumble upon cool rock churches, quirky shops, and some great local food.

We kinda just wandered around looking for the pins on my map until we got hot and hungry, haha. But there’s a few things you shouldn’t miss while exploring the Sassi:

Take a scenic stroll along Via Madonna delle Virtù

Kick off your day in Matera with a leisurely walk down Via Madonna delle Virtù. We LOVED this charming street – with its elevated position you get a stunning perspective of the iconic Sassi cave dwellings and the lush Valle dei Diddi below. 

It kinda hugs the Sassi and is mostly flat, so it’s the perfect spot to take in the landscape before diving into the rest of your day in this UNESCO World Heritage site.

Admire the stunning rock churches 

When you’re in Matera, you absolutely have to check out its stunning rock churches – especially the Church of Santa Maria di Idris and the Church of San Pietro Caveoso. These incredible structures are not just architectural feats; they’re masterpieces carved right into the rock, complete with vibrant frescoes and intricate sculptures that tell a story of the city’s rich heritage.

I’ve never seen a church like this before so was totally blown away; I mean, just look at it!

The Church of Santa Maria di Idris, often referred to as “Madonna de Idris,” is one of the most scenic rock churches in the area (and my favorite!). It sits atop the rocky spur of Montirone (right in the middle of Sasso Caveoso), offering breathtaking views of the surrounding landscape. This unique Catholic church features a crypt that houses well-preserved frescoes, showcasing the artistic heritage of the region.

San Pietro Caveoso (Chiesa di San Pietro Caveoso) is the second of the most famous of the rock churches in Matera, dating back to the 13th century, and right next to The Church of Santa Maria! Carved directly into the soft limestone of the Sasso Caveoso, the church blends Romanesque and Gothic styles with a simple yet striking interior, including a barrel-vaulted ceiling and ancient frescoes. Plus tons of spectacular panoramic views over the maze of cave dwellings and the valleys below. 

And a quick tip: if you plan to explore these sacred spaces during your one day in Matera, make sure to dress appropriately! Covering your shoulders and knees is a must – it’s all about showing respect for the traditions of Italy. 

Learn about Matera at Casa Grotta

Time to learn about Matera and the cave dwellings! This historic home is a recreated traditional cave house that gives visitors a glimpse into the daily lives of the people who lived here for centuries. It’s a great experience to have in order to understand how the villagers lived thousands of years ago.

The Casa Grotta nei Sassi di Matera is set up as a small museum, showcasing the simple, rustic living conditions of Matera’s past residents. The cave is furnished with authentic period furniture, tools, artifacts, and even household items that were used by families who once lived in these rock homes. You’ll see how they lived with minimal comforts, relying on the natural surroundings for shelter and resources.

Check out Matera Cathedral (Cattedrale di Santa Maria della Bruna)

The Matera Cathedral is one of the most prominent landmarks in Matera, and something you shouldn’t miss out on. Perched on top of Civita Hill at the highest point in the city, it’s hard to miss, and the view over the Sassi district? Absolutely unreal. The church itself is a beautiful blend of Romanesque and Apulian Romanesque styles, with that stunning white stone facade and rose window that makes it stand out. A real showstopper.

Inside, it’s just as impressive – think vaulted ceilings, frescoes, and a crypt that’s got some serious historical vibes. Plus, the location means you get those epic panoramic views over the city and its cave dwellings. So, yeah, it’s definitely worth a visit if you’re in the area.

Learn history at Casa Noha

If you’re looking to dive into Matera’s history, Casa Noha is a great place to start. It’s not a typical museum with exhibits or old furniture, since the space was fully renovated, but it offers something pretty unique—a 25-minute film experience spread across three rooms. 

The documentary is an awesome way to get a deeper understanding of Matera’s past, and honestly, we kind of wish we’d started our whole trip here! The audio is provided in multiple languages, so it’s easy to follow, and the storytelling is well done.

That said, Casa Noha does get mixed reviews – some people find it a bit overpriced, but if you’re looking for a quick, engaging way to learn about the city, it’s definitely worth the time. I’d suggest watching the film first, then heading out to explore the city with all that context in mind — it’ll totally change how you see Matera!

Sip cocktails in a cave at Bar Zipa

Bar Zipa is the coolest little cave bar in Matera, and it ended up being a great recommendation from our hotel! The place has cushions scattered around, creating a super chill vibe where you can relax and enjoy a drink.

When we visited, it was pretty busy (and HOT!), and of course, all the shaded spots were already taken. We gave up on waiting for a spot outside and decided to head inside because, honestly, I couldn’t bear the thought of basking in the sun any longer, haha! 

Note that this spot is usually recommended for sunset, BUT – there’s no view of the Sassi here! Instead, we came for a drink midday when we needed a little pick me up, and went to a terrace bar overlooking the Sassi later on for sunset.

Take an Ape tour of Matera 

If you’re looking to learn about Matera’s history without doing more walking (because let’s be real, those cobblestone streets and steps can get tiring), an Ape tour is a fun and chill way to see the city! 

Apes are three-wheeled Italian vehicles, and there’s plenty of tours that take you to all of the must-see spots. We saw them all over Puglia as well. 

Late Afternoon Matera Itinerary: Modern Matera

Lunch at a Local Trattoria

After huffing and puffing up and down the stone steps of the Sassi, you’re probably ready for some lunch! We had a super casual meal of fresh pasta from Passeggiando 1 – The Way Of Pasta and it was delicious! You’d think after a week of road tripping around Puglia and eating pasta everyday we’d get sick of it, but nope! Our love of homemade pasta goes deep! 

If you’re looking for another option, head to Il Rusticone (literally a one minute walk from The Way of Pasta, haha). While pizza is their specialty, they also serve meat and cheese boards and puccia (kind of like a panini, but with pizza crust and stuffed with a variety of cured meats and cheeses).

Explore Matera’s New Town (The Piano)

When you’ve had your fill of ancient cave dwellings and stunning views of the Sassi, it’s time to head to Matera’s New Town, also known as The Piano. This part of the city is a world away from the rustic charm of the Sassi, offering a totally different vibe. Think modern shops, cozy cafes, and lively piazzas. 

The Piano is where most of Matera’s residents moved to in the 1950s, after the government relocated them from the Sassi to help with overcrowding and sanitation issues. It’s a blend of traditional Italian streets with a more contemporary feel — so it’s the perfect place to spend an afternoon shopping or just wandering around, soaking up the local atmosphere.

Of course there’s a few things not to miss over in this part of Matera:

  • Cool down underground at Palombaro Lungo: If you’re looking for a break from the sun (because, let’s face it, it can get toasty in Matera), check out Palombaro Lungo, an incredible ancient underground cistern. It’s carved right into the rock and was once used to store water for the city. The best part? It only takes about 10 minutes to walk through and only a few euros.
  • Snack Stop at Bar Caffè Tripoli: Need a quick pick-me-up? Bar Caffè Tripoli in the New Town is a great spot for coffee and pastries. With its classic Italian café vibe, it’s perfect for relaxing and enjoying the local atmosphere. Grab a seat outside, enjoy a cappuccino, and soak in the vibe of Matera’s more modern side.
  • Tre Archi Viewpoint: Head to Belvedere Luigi Guerricchio dei “Tre Archi” (aka the Three Arches viewpoint) for one of the best panoramic views of Matera. I loved admiring the city’s unique layout and getting a sense of the contrast between the modern town and the ancient cave dwellings here.
  • Cool Off with some Gelato: No visit to Matera is complete without gelato! After a snack, head to one of the local gelaterias for a scoop (or two) of creamy, delicious gelato. We’re obsessed with classic flavors like stracciatella and pistachio – mmm… the best! We went to both Gelateria Caffè Cremeria dell’Angelo (in the modern part of Matera) and I Vizi degli Angeli (near our hotel) and enjoyed both spots, haha.

Cave Spa

Before getting ready for sunset and dinner, might as well take advantage of the spa (if your hotel has one of course). Luckily for us, our hotel, Aquatio, had one of the most epic spas I’ve seen in my life –  an entire wellness center complete with a swimming pool carved into the rock. 

Belvedere Murgia Timone – OPTIONAL

If you have time (and don’t mind moving your car…), drive over to Belvedere Murgia Timone (about 15 minutes away) – another of the best viewpoints of Matera! Some people decide to hike here, but to be honest, I really don’t recommend that if it’s even a little hot out. 

After finally finding a parking spot the day before, the last thing we wanted to do was move our car and lose our spot, so we decided to skip this. I guess we could’ve gone the next day once we left Matera, but we had a few other stops on the way back to Bari we wanted to see (namely Gravina in Puglia and Altamura), so we decided to skip Belvedere Murgia Timone.

Things to do in Matera at Night

Enjoy an aperitivo with a view

After a relaxing spa session (or perhaps a hike up to Belvedere Murgia Timone), it’s time to grab a sunset spritz! And the best part about Matera is that since the entire town is built into the rocks, there’s plenty of great spots to enjoy your drink with a view.

  • Crialoss Panoramic Cave Cafe Bistrot: This charming little spot offers some of the best views of Matera, along with drinks and light bites like salads, sandwiches, and bruschettas. We actually ended up here midday, simply because it was on the opposite side of town and, well, I wasn’t about to climb all those steep steps again later on (lol!). Note that the cafe is open from 1-10pm, but you can only make a reservation until 6pm – after that, it’s first-come, first-served, so plan accordingly.
  • Terrazza Cavaliere: This is where we went for sunset, and lemme tell you – it was packed! We got lucky and snagged a table a bit before the rush, so if you want a good spot, I recommend arriving early to beat the crowd. But once you’re settled, the views are definitely worth it.
  • Area 8: If you’re looking for something a bit different (way more modern with a cool, colorful vibe), head to this cocktail bar! It admittedly doesn’t have a sweeping view of Matera like the others do, but hey, nothing wrong with a little variety!

Sunset at Belvedere di Piazza Giovanni Pascoli 

Matera has tons of great places to watch the sunset thanks to its dramatic landscape of cave dwellings and ancient architecture. But if you’re looking for the perfect spot? Belvedere di Piazza Giovanni Pascoli is a personal favorite – mainly because it was just a short walk from our hotel, and next to Terrazza Cavaliere, haha.

If you’ve had a few cocktails, it’s easy to lose track of time, so make sure you arrive a bit early to grab a good spot and enjoy the changing colors as the sun dips behind the Sassi! It gets busy, busy, busy, but understandably so since it’s just gorgeous!

Enjoy dinner in Matera

When it comes to dining in Matera, you’ve got plenty of delicious options to choose from. I mean, this is Italy we’re talking about! BUT if you wanna eat at one of the top restaurants in town, you’ll need to make a reservation. Most places are on the smaller side and tend to fill up quickly.

We didn’t plan ahead at all (whoops), so ended up at a random spot, Morgan Restaurant, which turned out to be a great find with homemade pizza and pasta!

If you’re looking for something fancy, you’ll be excited to hear that Matera’s home to a few Michelin-starred restaurants, including Dimora Ulmo, Vitantonio Lombardo Ristorante, Le Bubbole, Baccanti, and Ego Ristorante Matera. 

In the mood for something a little less formal but still high-quality? Check out Osteria Matera Mì, Ristorante Burro Salato, OHIMÈ Matera, Ristorante 900 Casa Taccardi, and Osteria al Casale. These spots offer refined, high-end meals with a relaxed vibe, perfect if you want great food without the stuffy atmosphere.

A few other dinner options if you wanna be more prepared than we were (aka make a reservation):

  • Regiacorte Restaurant and Lounge Terrace: This is one of the most popular upscale restaurants in all of Matera, since you get an amazing view of the Rock Church. It’s definitely on the pricier side, but there’s both tasting menus and a la carte options. Make a reservation and be sure to request a table with a terrace view (although the indoor seating is inside a cave, so no bad options here).
  • La Lopa: With lots of traditional dishes of Matera on the menu and literally tucked away inside a cave, what can be better?!
  • Vitantonio Lombardo Ristorante: One of the most creative menus in Matera, with a few tasting menus to choose from. Everything at this fine-dining restaurant is presented in a super creative way, and you get to eat inside a cave! Albeit it’s definitely on the pricier side.
  • Trattoria del Caveoso: Here you’ll find regional cheeses, pasta, & grilled meats in a stylish, rustic space carved right into the rock, plus a terrace! Expect warm and authentic flavors in a cozy, inviting atmosphere.

Take an Evening Stroll Through the Sassi

After dinner, take an evening stroll through the Sassi. The narrow, winding streets really come alive at night, illuminated by soft street lamps that make the ancient stonework look even more enchanting. We loved wandering through the alleys after dinner – everything just looks so different in soft lighting. 

And if you’re craving a bit of nightlife, hit up some of Matera’s trendy bars. Bar Vico Solitario has a cozy vibe with killer cocktails, while Caffè Montalbano often features live music or events that keep the energy alive. And you’ll probably even see some of the locals come out – it’s not all tourists here like most other Italian spots.

To wrap up your night, don’t miss the chance to take in the views from one of the lookouts over the Sassi. And yes, we went back to Belvedere di Piazza Giovanni Pascoli, haha – told you we went there a lot! The skyline at night, with the ancient cave dwellings illuminated, is a sight I’ll never forget. Grab a few photos or simply soak in the beauty – it’s a magical way to end your one day in Matera!

Hope this gives you lots of ideas on things to do in Matera! Are you planning to spend one day in Matera soon?!



The post One Day in Matera Itinerary: Italy’s Breathtaking Sassi Escape appeared first on A Passion and A Passport.

]]>
https://apassionandapassport.com/things-to-do-in-matera-itinerary/feed/ 0